<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"	><channel><title>Sales Archives - inFlow Inventory</title><atom:link href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/sales/feed" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" /><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/sales</link><description></description><lastBuildDate>Fri, 10 Oct 2025 13:08:33 +0000</lastBuildDate><language>en-CA</language><sy:updatePeriod>hourly</sy:updatePeriod><sy:updateFrequency>1</sy:updateFrequency><generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.2</generator><image><url>https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/10/apple-touch-icon.png</url><title>Sales Archives - inFlow Inventory</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/sales</link><width>32</width><height>32</height></image> <item><title>Improved sales orders ✨</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta#comments</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 04 Jun 2025 12:33:52 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowinventory.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=61994</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>We’re excited to release updated sales orders that will streamline your fulfillment processes! Take a look below for an overview, and feel free to let us know what you think by filling out the feedback form!&#160; Creating a sales order Order details&#160; At the top of the screen are all the details for your sales. [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta">Improved sales orders ✨</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>We’re excited to release updated sales orders that will streamline your fulfillment processes! Take a look below for an overview, and feel free to let us know what you think by filling out the feedback form!&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FVMBrpVbM62U%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-a-sales-order">Creating a sales order</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the Main Menu, click on the <em>Create</em> button (plus icon), then <em>Sales order</em>.</li><li>Select a customer from the list, or click Start with new customer.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" width="856" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/1-1.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-62066"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-order-details-nbsp">Order details&nbsp;</h2><p>At the top of the screen are all the details for your sales. This section shows:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Your company’s internal ordering information (order number, date, fulfillment location, etc.)</li><li>Customer name, billing, and shipping addresses.&nbsp;</li><li>Sales order status and payment information.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1600" height="1363" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXdoVNSnDHkOEy0Pd4kKuNrGjzBtV90WF9fWDmdqby-AKv0ckchXChggn1LF5OTHB298NF9J0dfOCD4rOQ8y1f8TDOiaBRzzq-BkRkJAqhY4SCVFVguLbAlaJ5CSYcx3_N8tZ_Mj.png" alt="" class="wp-image-62059" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXdoVNSnDHkOEy0Pd4kKuNrGjzBtV90WF9fWDmdqby-AKv0ckchXChggn1LF5OTHB298NF9J0dfOCD4rOQ8y1f8TDOiaBRzzq-BkRkJAqhY4SCVFVguLbAlaJ5CSYcx3_N8tZ_Mj.png 1600w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXdoVNSnDHkOEy0Pd4kKuNrGjzBtV90WF9fWDmdqby-AKv0ckchXChggn1LF5OTHB298NF9J0dfOCD4rOQ8y1f8TDOiaBRzzq-BkRkJAqhY4SCVFVguLbAlaJ5CSYcx3_N8tZ_Mj-1280x1090.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXdoVNSnDHkOEy0Pd4kKuNrGjzBtV90WF9fWDmdqby-AKv0ckchXChggn1LF5OTHB298NF9J0dfOCD4rOQ8y1f8TDOiaBRzzq-BkRkJAqhY4SCVFVguLbAlaJ5CSYcx3_N8tZ_Mj-980x835.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXdoVNSnDHkOEy0Pd4kKuNrGjzBtV90WF9fWDmdqby-AKv0ckchXChggn1LF5OTHB298NF9J0dfOCD4rOQ8y1f8TDOiaBRzzq-BkRkJAqhY4SCVFVguLbAlaJ5CSYcx3_N8tZ_Mj-480x409.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1600px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-product-table">Product table</h2><p>The product table is where you&#8217;ll add the products your customer is ordering or returning.</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click on <em>Add Products</em>. The product picker will stay open, allowing you to select multiple products at once. To increase the quantity of a single product, click on it repeatedly.&nbsp;</li><li>If you’re using a barcode scanner, select <em>Scan to add</em>.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfLa0aKwo-v-KhlmDHStvT7WitI49idAU_EnAXSliaGl8ULyI-ZnOIy8almTtDcaLLsondW3KOubq-pPLliPIev14Qu7nXpOXUo4YEo5QHUrRdpQEOe9ABubwBCrP_QVZ7h5vzQNw.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-62062"/></figure><ol start="3" class="wp-block-list"><li>If needed, edit the <em>quantity</em> and <em>unit price</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>You can change the sorting on the product table by clicking on the table headings or by selecting the grab handles to rearrange the products.</li><li>Next to the <em>Save </em>button, you can print, email, or add an attachment to the order.</li><li>Click <em>Save</em> when done.</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-picking-products">Picking products</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>In the product table, select the <em>Pick </em>tab.</li><li>Select the products that have been picked, or select <em>Pick all </em>to pick all the products on the sales order.</li><li>If<em> you are</em> using a barcode scanner, click <em>Scan to pick</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>Save the order.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1970" height="1710" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/4.png" alt="" class="wp-image-62070" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/4.png 1970w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/4-1280x1111.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/4-980x851.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/4-480x417.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1970px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-shipping-amp-completing-the-order">Shipping &amp; completing the order</h2><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-shipping-orders-with-a-single-box-nbsp">Shipping orders with a single box&nbsp;</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>After picking, toggle on <em>Ship order</em> from the order summary (top of the order).&nbsp;</li><li>Select the <em>Ship </em>tab.&nbsp;</li><li>Click <em>Ship</em> <em>order </em>and enter the shipping details, then click <em>Ship order</em> to continue.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfHUUqIVPyAGcsP3kV4aTUc1MWzjJ9pewQ-W-HsJQQMdmfAdzjxYHpnFbphMoW6LzKDxknl_itUNxZqtrYbmVI069x5x6kwxN0c-C-MEX2DLvNlQOrLVmYKHhdlrn56K7_ep5Ys.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-62063"/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-shipping-orders-with-multiple-boxes">Shipping orders with multiple boxes</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Use the <em>Pick </em>tab to pick the products that are ready to ship.&nbsp;</li><li>Toggle on <em>Ship order</em> from the order summary (top of the order), then click on the <em>Ship </em>tab.&nbsp;</li><li>Select <em>Ship with multiple boxes</em> to ship products into different boxes or containers.&nbsp;</li><li>Click on <em>Ship this box to </em>enter the shipping details, then complete the shipping portion of the order.&nbsp;</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXe9L88UlU15Z8q7-z3d4e3vFQfas2ePk8xMGJP3kJbs0ollJTHKzTumM3EqUzoa-wE8ht7RzLcNDneLRjFcc4H0mynrEIHVK1cODPval93BzjMYQtoLNFQ22vhJzn-Vt0aFH1gB9g.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-62064"/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-paying-the-order">Paying the order</h3><p>On the order tab, enter the payment in the <em>Paid </em>field. If the order is paid in full, select <em>Mark paid.&nbsp;</em></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-completing-orders-without-shipping">Completing orders without shipping</h2><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-picked-orders">Picked orders</h3><p>For orders where the products are picked, enter a payment in the <em>Paid field. </em>Or to pay the order in full, select <em>Mark paid </em>to complete the sales order.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1600" height="1369" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfTnyxlpRFqMdg5uOCQ8xmJVbNf524PlH-qGBYesqaCrYrtnaGxdzkiObKKESzT8Z6PY0cJmRKRlQdkyExnD5qGnvIHL-ImmeI1f5beBBGpnA7ayy-F61cnTbrmdCXZGVsNMCrG4w.png" alt="" class="wp-image-62060" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfTnyxlpRFqMdg5uOCQ8xmJVbNf524PlH-qGBYesqaCrYrtnaGxdzkiObKKESzT8Z6PY0cJmRKRlQdkyExnD5qGnvIHL-ImmeI1f5beBBGpnA7ayy-F61cnTbrmdCXZGVsNMCrG4w.png 1600w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfTnyxlpRFqMdg5uOCQ8xmJVbNf524PlH-qGBYesqaCrYrtnaGxdzkiObKKESzT8Z6PY0cJmRKRlQdkyExnD5qGnvIHL-ImmeI1f5beBBGpnA7ayy-F61cnTbrmdCXZGVsNMCrG4w-1280x1095.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfTnyxlpRFqMdg5uOCQ8xmJVbNf524PlH-qGBYesqaCrYrtnaGxdzkiObKKESzT8Z6PY0cJmRKRlQdkyExnD5qGnvIHL-ImmeI1f5beBBGpnA7ayy-F61cnTbrmdCXZGVsNMCrG4w-980x839.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXfTnyxlpRFqMdg5uOCQ8xmJVbNf524PlH-qGBYesqaCrYrtnaGxdzkiObKKESzT8Z6PY0cJmRKRlQdkyExnD5qGnvIHL-ImmeI1f5beBBGpnA7ayy-F61cnTbrmdCXZGVsNMCrG4w-480x411.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1600px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-unpicked-orders-nbsp">Unpicked orders&nbsp;</h3><p>If the products on the order aren’t picked, click the <em>Mark paid</em> and <em>Fulfill</em> buttons to complete the sales order.</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1600" height="1364" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXeW7FCaO1PjYDZ4Nl_xZz0HCdKkuq_APYFAhKW2_LFNcmYp5P8mfEFAsRD_70QkbjBHTl3r8hzxW7aiU4Kyc5e8LJnPfn7BcwnMWuKp5n8tzA1oTmpE_hAVmqm_I1osj54y-buRNA.png" alt="" class="wp-image-62061" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXeW7FCaO1PjYDZ4Nl_xZz0HCdKkuq_APYFAhKW2_LFNcmYp5P8mfEFAsRD_70QkbjBHTl3r8hzxW7aiU4Kyc5e8LJnPfn7BcwnMWuKp5n8tzA1oTmpE_hAVmqm_I1osj54y-buRNA.png 1600w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXeW7FCaO1PjYDZ4Nl_xZz0HCdKkuq_APYFAhKW2_LFNcmYp5P8mfEFAsRD_70QkbjBHTl3r8hzxW7aiU4Kyc5e8LJnPfn7BcwnMWuKp5n8tzA1oTmpE_hAVmqm_I1osj54y-buRNA-1280x1091.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXeW7FCaO1PjYDZ4Nl_xZz0HCdKkuq_APYFAhKW2_LFNcmYp5P8mfEFAsRD_70QkbjBHTl3r8hzxW7aiU4Kyc5e8LJnPfn7BcwnMWuKp5n8tzA1oTmpE_hAVmqm_I1osj54y-buRNA-980x835.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/AD_4nXeW7FCaO1PjYDZ4Nl_xZz0HCdKkuq_APYFAhKW2_LFNcmYp5P8mfEFAsRD_70QkbjBHTl3r8hzxW7aiU4Kyc5e8LJnPfn7BcwnMWuKp5n8tzA1oTmpE_hAVmqm_I1osj54y-buRNA-480x409.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1600px, 100vw" /></figure><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta">Improved sales orders ✨</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/improved-sales-orders-beta/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>1</slash:comments></item><item><title>How to create email templates with inFlow&#8217;s Email Designer</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 17 Jul 2024 03:00:00 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=54620</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>inFlow&#8217;s Email Designer simplifies creating email templates for all your inFlow orders. See below for more details. Web Getting started To start, go to inFlow&#8217;s Order settings and select Email Designer (Main Menu&#62;Options&#62;Orders.) Email template types On this screen, you can toggle between the list of template types from the different areas of inFlow. Default [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer">How to create email templates with inFlow&#8217;s Email Designer</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>inFlow&#8217;s Email Designer simplifies creating email templates for all your inFlow orders. See below for more details.</p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-web">Web</h2><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2Fr5B2zdVGCcU%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-getting-started">Getting started</h2><p>To start, go to <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow&#8217;s Order settings</a> and select <em>Email Designer</em> (Main Menu&gt;<em>Options</em>&gt;<em>Orders</em>.)</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-email-template-types">Email template types</h2><p>On this screen, you can toggle between the list of template types from the different areas of inFlow.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2606" height="1600" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/1-4.png" alt="This screen shows the different template types for inFlow's Email Designer." class="wp-image-55162" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/1-4.png 2606w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/1-4-1280x786.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/1-4-980x602.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/1-4-480x295.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2606px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-default-styling">Default styling</h2><p>This section of the email designer is where you can set a header image, image size, and button color that will apply to all email templates. Click on the plus button to choose a different color.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1612" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2.gif" alt="The Email Designer Default styling options." class="wp-image-55161"/></figure><p>If you&#8217;d like to remove changes made to the Default styling, click on <em>Reset</em>.</p><p>When done, click <em>Save &amp; close</em>.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="638" height="1288" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-1.png" alt="The &quot;Reset&quot; button on the Default styling screen of the Email Designer." class="wp-image-55163" style="width:386px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-1.png 638w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-1-480x969.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 638px, 100vw" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>The reset button will revert recent changes; however, it won&#8217;t restore the default styling to its original state.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-editing-an-email-template">Editing an email template</h2><p>Hover over one of the email templates and select <em>Edit template</em>.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-button-text">Button text</h3><p>Use the <em>Button text</em> field to change the text on the button in the email template. (This button is what the recipient will select to view the document.)</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2198" height="1288" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-2.png" alt="The Email Designer screen, with a focus on the &quot;Button text&quot; field that can be modified. " class="wp-image-55164" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-2.png 2198w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-2-1280x750.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-2-980x574.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-2-480x281.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2198px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-using-custom-or-default-styling-nbsp">Using custom or Default styling&nbsp;</h3><p>The Email Designer uses the default styling for all email templates. You can edit the default styling by selecting <em>Edit default</em>, or you can override the defaults by selecting <em>Use custom styling</em>.&nbsp;</p><p>When using the custom styling, you can select the header image, image size, and button color. </p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1818" height="803" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/5.png" alt="The &quot;Default styling&quot; and the &quot;Use custom styling&quot; side-by-side comparison." class="wp-image-55165" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/5.png 1818w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/5-1280x565.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/5-980x433.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/5-480x212.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1818px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-reset-nbsp">Reset&nbsp;</h3><p>This button allows you to undo any recent changes. However, the reset button does not restore the template back to its original state.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-subject-line">Subject line</h3><p>The first part of the email you can customize is the subject line. The subject contains variables in brackets that are placeholders that allow each email to be personalized to the recipient.&nbsp;</p><p>Example: The sales order default subject line is <code>Sales order - {{so.order_number}}</code>.&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Sales order = The inFlow order you&#8217;re emailing from.&nbsp;</li><li>{{So.order_number}} = The sales order number on the document.</li></ul><p>To add other variables, click the plus icon, then select a variable from the list.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1310" height="1020" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/6.png" alt="Editing the subject line with the email Designer. Variables can be added by selecting the plus icon." class="wp-image-55166" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/6.png 1310w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/6-1280x997.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/6-980x763.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/6-480x374.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1310px, 100vw" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Feel free to add or remove variables, but please avoid changing the periods, underscores, or brackets within the variables, as doing so may cause them to stop working properly.</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-email-body">Email body</h3><p>You can edit the email template in the body field below the subject line. To add variables to the email body, click on the plus icon.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1268" height="1134" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/7-1.png" alt="Editing the email body in the Email Designer. Variables can be added by selecting the plus icon." class="wp-image-55167" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/7-1.png 1268w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/7-1-980x876.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/7-1-480x429.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1268px, 100vw" /></figure><p>When done, click <em>Save &amp; close</em>.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Customizing variables&nbsp;</h2><p>If you want to make slight changes to the variables, just add the info within the variable brackets. This is done by adding a vertical bar after the variable name, followed by a modifier within the variable brackets. See below for some examples.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Capitalization&nbsp;&nbsp;</h3><p>For any variable, if you want to make all uppercase, you can add <code>{{variable| upcase}}</code> in the variable brackets.&nbsp;</p><p>Example: <code>{{so.customer.name| upcase}}</code> = JOSEPH BUCKLEY</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Date formatting</h3><p>By default, date fields will match the date formatting based on your browser setting and add a timestamp.&nbsp;</p><p>In the examples below, we&#8217;re using {{so.due_date}} but you can change this variable with any of the other date variables in the email template.&nbsp;</p><p>Default date display: <code>{{so.order_number}}</code> = 08/03/2024 12:45:52 +00:00</p><figure class="wp-block-table is-style-stripes"><table><thead><tr><th>Formatting options:</th><th>Result</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MMM dd, yyyy"}}</code></td><td>Aug 03, 2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MM/dd/yyyy"}}</code></td><td>08/03/2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MM/dd/yy"}}</code></td><td>08/03/24</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd MMM, yyyy"}}</code></td><td>03 Aug, 2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd/MM/yyyy"}}</code></td><td>03/08/2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd/MM/yy"}}</code></td><td>03/08/24</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="4868" height="2440" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/Custom-variable-arrow.png" alt="" class="wp-image-55465" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/Custom-variable-arrow.png 4868w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/Custom-variable-arrow-1280x642.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/Custom-variable-arrow-980x491.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/Custom-variable-arrow-480x241.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 4868px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-emailing-a-template">Emailing a template</h2><p>Now that your template has been created you can email it from any of the inFlow orders.&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open an order and click <em>Email </em>then select the document you want to email.&nbsp;</li><li>Review the email fields and the email template below. To make changes to the template, click on <em>Edit email template, </em>make changes to the template, then click <em>Save &amp; close</em>. <em>&nbsp;</em></li><li>Return to the order &gt; click <em>Email</em> and select the document.&nbsp;</li><li>Click <em>Send</em> when done.&nbsp;</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2614" height="1712" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/8.png" alt="The inFlow sales order screen that shows how to send an email and edit the email template if needed. " class="wp-image-55168" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/8.png 2614w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/8-1280x838.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/8-980x642.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/8-480x314.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2614px, 100vw" /></figure><p>To learn more about emailing documents from inFlow,<a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-email-invoices-and-other-documents-directly-from-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener"> take a look at this guide</a>.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-what-else-can-i-customize-in-inflow">What else can I customize in inFlow? </h2><p>In inFlow, you can customize different areas to meet your team&#8217;s needs.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customizable-inflow-features">Customizable inFlow features </h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-rename-fields/">Rename fields</a>: Rename most of inFlow&#8217;s fields to a term of your choice.</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-customize-my-document-numbers/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Change order numbers</a>: Change order prefixes. </li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-up-custom-fields/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Custom fields</a>: Track additional data with custom fields.</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/print-product-labels-in-inflow/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Label Designer</a>: Create product labels to include the barcode, image, and product name. </li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Document Designer</a>: Create and customize sales and purchasing documents.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2F79Hk0VmJr98%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /> <figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-windows">Windows</h2><p>If you are using inFlow for Windows and want to access email templates and send documents designed by the Document Designer, you can seamlessly switch to utilizing these powerful features!</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Before you start</h2><p>Switching to inFlow&#8217;s Email and Document Designer means that some Windows app features will no longer be available, such as:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Documents created in Microsoft Word can be redesigned in inFlow&#8217;s user-friendly <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Document Designer</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>inFlow Print Settings (document styles, Document page numbers, and footers.)</li><li>Legacy email settings.</li></ul><p>Other notable changes:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Emails will be sent from <a href="mailto:noreply@inflowinventory.com">noreply@inflowinventory.com</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>Documents will be sent as links instead of attachments.&nbsp;</li><li>All email and document templates can only be modified on inFlow for Web.</li></ul><p>If your team has been using inFlow before July 2024, the Email and Document Designer are optional and require <strong>inFlow Admins to opt in</strong>. We suggest previewing these <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">features in inFlow for Web</a> before making changes.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-warning-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Once you&#8217;ve opted in, you won&#8217;t be able to switch back to using legacy email settings and the original documents from inFlow for Windows. <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/contact-support" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Contact the inFlow team</a> if you have any questions.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Converting emails and documents</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>To start, open an order in inFlow with an Admin account (sales, purchase order, etc.) &gt; then click <em>Email </em>or<em> Print</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>In the email document screen, click <em>Get the latest.</em></li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1746" height="1824" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2-2-white.png" alt="" class="wp-image-55215" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2-2-white.png 1746w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2-2-white-1280x1337.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2-2-white-980x1024.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/2-2-white-480x501.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1746px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="3"><li>Review the information on-screen, then click <i>Update</i>.</ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1526" height="1235" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-55214" style="width:823px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-2.png 1526w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-2-1280x1036.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-2-980x793.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/3-2-480x388.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1526px, 100vw" /></figure><p>You&#8217;re all set! </p><p>From now on, when you send emails from the inFlow Windows app, the email body will be automatically filled with templates created by the Email Designer, and you&#8217;ll have access to the documents created by the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Document Designer</a>.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Accessing the Email Designer&nbsp;</h2><p>As mentioned, email templates can only be edited from <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow for Web</a>. See below for steps on accessing the Email Designer settings from the inFlow Windows app.</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open any inFlow order in inFlow, then click <em>Email</em> then select a document.&nbsp;</li><li>At the bottom of the email screen, click on <em>Edit Template.</em> This will open the Email Designer on inFlow for Web.</li><li>After making changes to a template, return to inFlow for Windows and close the Compose Email window.</li><li>Click <em>Email</em> on the order again to load the updated template.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1778" height="1282" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-3.png" alt="" class="wp-image-55216" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-3.png 1778w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-3-1280x923.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-3-980x707.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/4-3-480x346.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1778px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Email Designer template types</h2><p>On this screen, you can toggle between the list of template types from the different areas of inFlow.</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdFmJ6wDE5PB0ZYIKUjNDziE_7wtlAurQt-yiOx1kIg_KrpIR5tH6-P95ORGSXWUvueVTOUKO-S0AzUwfvzXXK0dmZP-HZ7Z7yAqhi-Iy7AMzuxD9WqZU8wuTR6OXuK0TEPywpqkOB7a7S5yFfKip3lzQS4?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" alt=""/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Default styling</h2><p>This section of the email designer is where you can set a header image, image size, and button color that will apply to all email templates. Click on the plus button to choose a different color.&nbsp;</p><p>If you&#8217;d like to remove changes made to the <em>Default styling, </em>click on <em>Reset</em>.</p><p>Note: The reset button will revert recent changes; however, it won&#8217;t restore the default styling to its original state.</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdXaL19Ae_KP8uaUOVfnIbY0h6oK_K0P4zmDpMHdcfewulYqnPicgIkVBoklAX98lHHjHq01UVARi8amXDmFK7vGUQPlLJdIgFWFf4wlPeSnUD_CHVn9QpL7qTczdGMKY5oemL5u-oDcK_pcaKW0Du-wPLR?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" alt=""/></figure><p>When done, click <em>Save &amp; close.</em></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Editing an email template</h2><p>Hover over one of the email templates and select <em>Edit template</em>.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Button text</h3><p>Use the <em>Button text</em> field to change the text on the button in the email template. (This button is what the recipient will select to view the document.)</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfn130gDGJ-mJ7JpdCA5tJlWwq3Mc7-AXab7zzceyZCtKFQuiK82SlDnJ6cyT7cn48AqQon7Pc3HQk3bq-YcdMgz80pMNIMaqsoEV8lhZVF2qoofFT5j1-PGXGy-S7oa_2x3qLhn29BvC6xdWe58WBZLE83?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" alt=""/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Using custom or Default styling&nbsp;</h3><p>The Email Designer uses the default styling for all email templates. You can edit the default styling by selecting <em>Edit default</em>, or you can override the defaults by selecting <em>Use custom styling</em>.&nbsp;</p><p>When using the custom styling, you can select the header image, image size, and button color. <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdNNk-q0AjhxbSIaR9EOsjXDjdWRex9t0rmHCLq_wOlFquBkMN1nQMPj7KgKJm3Fv6eGBoNCRHVrlTvEf072TtC7wXn2VEBEkcv_OzzIID4ikAyr8zeebgfi-N7FeRfXNtJoudRZZxxYiheHnV4OL6xV3E?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" width="624" height="276"></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Reset&nbsp;</h3><p>This button allows you to undo any recent changes. However, the reset button does not restore the template back to its original state.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Subject line</h3><p>The first part of the email you can customize is the subject line. The subject contains variables in brackets that are placeholders that allow each email to be personalized to the recipient.&nbsp;</p><p>Example: The sales order default subject line is Sales order &#8211; {{so.order_number}}.&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Sales order = The inFlow order you&#8217;re emailing from.&nbsp;</li><li>{{So.order_number}} = The sales order number on the document.</li></ul><p>To add other variables, click the plus icon, then select a variable from the list.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXefBsonzHJ7U-kablhR-8msWd4vhV6J8DXyAALNpU5xRXTvSEnmmbk03Z8tt-CpWixK8wZ6n4FB8eedJ2vdwBZ0nPskMUWWFdWYQ80oJlT6CriJnOtlBHIH2xXnQ2KZDbKg_SessZXiX_4lfjdXrYMMsAj8?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" alt=""/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Feel free to add or remove variables, but please avoid changing the periods, underscores, or brackets within the variables, as doing so may cause them to stop working properly.</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Email body</h3><p>You can edit the email template in the body field below the subject line. To add variables to the email body, click on the plus icon.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXda5brlOsc6Iaj_d4wCiiqCqxX_KwBmqpg_OFRutueAwZoZ1WrZ3mXZ479pv3JbZO2E_QCfJNNgLi3Ay3ZyF8-eG5Tg81WpZG7tDmTbZm5zWglfgZoxAse9CYdiYK3UtK9ysqMcjx6hYXznZu-Cwku3Sf5q?key=nCorR9jktqe7DTASF0_T1Q" alt=""/></figure><p>When done, click <em>Save &amp; close</em>.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Customizing variables&nbsp;</h2><p>If you want to make slight changes to the variables, just add in the info within the variable brackets. This is done by adding a vertical bar after the variable name, followed by a modifier within the variable brackets. See below for some examples.&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Capitalization&nbsp;&nbsp;</h3><p>For any variable, if you want to make all uppercase, you can add <code>{{variable| upcase}}</code> in the variable brackets.&nbsp;</p><p>Example: <code>{{so.customer.name| upcase}}</code> = JOSEPH BUCKLEY</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Date formatting</h3><p>By default, date fields will match the date formatting based on your browser setting and add a timestamp.&nbsp;</p><p>In the examples below, we&#8217;re using {{so.due_date}} but you can change this variable with any of the other date variables in the email template.&nbsp;</p><p>Default date display: <code>{{so.order_number}}</code> = 08/03/2024 12:45:52 +00:00</p><figure class="wp-block-table is-style-stripes"><table><thead><tr><th>Formatting options:</th><th>Result</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MMM dd, yyyy"}}</code></td><td>Aug 03, 2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MM/dd/yyyy"}}</code></td><td>08/03/2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "MM/dd/yy"}}</code></td><td>08/03/24</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd MMM, yyyy"}}</code></td><td>03 Aug, 2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd/MM/yyyy"}}</code></td><td>03/08/2024</td></tr><tr><td><code>{{so.due_date| date: "dd/MM/yy"}}</code></td><td>03/08/24</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer">How to create email templates with inFlow&#8217;s Email Designer</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>How to customize your documents with inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer#comments</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 08 May 2024 14:03:15 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=53198</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Unlock the power of inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer to take your documents to the next level. With our easy-to-follow guide, learn how to customize your documents and make them stand out. Web Document Designer video Take a look at the video below for a visual guide on customizing documents using the Document Designer. Please note that [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer">How to customize your documents with inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Unlock the power of inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer to take your documents to the next level. With our easy-to-follow guide, learn how to customize your documents and make them stand out.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-web">Web</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-designer-video">Document Designer video</h2><p>Take a look at the video below for a visual guide on customizing documents using the Document Designer.</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FeXNsOuxhbDc%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Please note that the inFlow menu has been updated since the release of the video above. The Document Designer can now be found under Main Menu &gt; <em>Settings</em> &gt; <em>Orders</em>.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-what-types-of-documents-can-i-make-nbsp">What types of documents can I make?&nbsp;</h2><p>With inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer, you can easily create various sales and purchasing documents. Below is a list of available document types.</p><figure class="wp-block-table is-style-stripes"><table class="has-fixed-layout" CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0><thead><tr><th>Sales documents</th><th>Purchasing documents</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><ul><li>Sales quote</li><li>Sales order</li><li>Receipt</li><li>Pick list</li><li>Packing slip</li><li>Box label</li><li>Box content list</li><li>Invoice</li><li>Credit note</li><li>Generic</li></td><td style="vertical-align:top;"> <ul><li>Purchase quote</li><li>Request for quote</li><li>Purchase order</li><li>Receiving note</li><li>Purchase invoice</li><li>Purchase return</li><li>Generic</li></td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-getting-started">Getting started</h2><p>Go to <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow&#8217;s Order settings</a> and select <em>Documents. </em>(Main Menu &gt; <em>Settings</em> &gt; <em>Orders.</em>)</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-types">Document types</h3><p>On this screen, there are examples of documents you can create. You can toggle between making a sales or purchasing document.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2762" height="1012" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53429" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1.png 2762w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-1280x469.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-980x359.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-480x176.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2762px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2760" height="646" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53431" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2.png 2760w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-1280x300.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-980x229.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-480x112.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2760px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-settings">Document settings</h3><p>This section of the document designer is where you can set a default letterhead and overall document styling options that will apply to all documents.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="570" height="322" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53435" style="width:364px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-1.png 570w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-1-480x271.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 570px, 100vw" /></figure><h4 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-default-letterhead">Default letterhead</h4><p>Here, you can set the default letterhead styling for your documents. Think of this as setting a letterhead template.</p><p>Select the <em>Alignment</em> and select the <em>Fields</em> to customize the details shown on the default letterhead.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table"><table><tbody><tr><td>Alignment</td><td>This display option is to have the letterhead left-aligned, center, and right-aligned.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>Fields</td><td>A list of available fields from inFlow&#8217;s <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-add-or-change-my-company-details/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">company details</a>.<br>Select <em>Options</em> to modify active fields, X to remove, and + to add fields to the letterhead block.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2490" height="1292" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53242" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4.png 2490w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-1280x664.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-980x508.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-480x249.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2490px, 100vw" /></figure><h4 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-default-styling">Default styling</h4><p>Here, you can choose the document designer&#8217;s default font size, font type, and heading colors.</p><figure class="wp-block-table"><table><tbody><tr><td>Font size</td><td>Select the document font size from small, medium, and large.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>Font</td><td>Choose which typeface/font style your documents should use.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>Heading color</td><td>You can choose the color of the document headings. The colors are from the color scheme of your company logo (if uploaded.)&nbsp;<br>Select the black pre-checked color to open the color picker. You can manually select a color or enter the HEX code.<br><br>Click on the arrows to toggle between HEX code, HSL (Hue, Saturation, and Lightness), or RGB (Red, Green, Blue) to enter values.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1632" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53243"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-selecting-a-document-type-amp-settings">Selecting a document type &amp; settings</h2><p>Now that we have reviewed the basics let&#8217;s create a new document.&nbsp;</p><p>Select a document template or <em>New document </em>from the top right-hand corner on the main Document Designer screen. For example, to create a new invoice document, choose <em>Invoice.&nbsp;</em></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-choosing-the-correct-document-type">Choosing the correct document type</h3><p>When designing a document, you must select the proper document from the list of available documents (listed above). This is because inFlow triggers actions when some documents are printed or emailed.&nbsp;</p><p>The most notable example is the <strong>Invoice</strong> document. inFlow will change any started or fulfilled sales order status to <em>Invoiced </em>when you print or email an invoice.</p><p>The <em>invoiced </em>status will set the due date on the sales order (if you have payment terms), and inFlow will send the sales order to any connected accounting integrations.&nbsp;</p><p>You could trigger these status changes accidentally by creating a &#8220;Bill of lading&#8221; from the <em>Invoice</em> document type.</p><p>Use the <em>Generic</em> document for documents that don&#8217;t fall under one of the sales or purchasing document types. These documents don&#8217;t trigger any order status changes.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-getting-to-know-the-document-designer">Getting to know the Document Designer</h3><p>Once in the document on the left-hand pane, you make changes to the overall document before customizing the document blocks. Settings you can change include:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Document name</li><li>Max paper width</li><li>Font size&nbsp;</li><li>Font</li><li>Heading color.</li></ul><p>Here is where you can select <em>Reset document</em> to set the document back to its original state.&nbsp;</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>If defaults have been set, documents will use the default styling first. You can override the defaults by selecting <em>Use custom.</em></p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="538" height="1106" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/7.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53244" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/7.png 538w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/7-480x987.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 538px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-blocks">Document blocks</h2><p>The Document designer consists of rows of blocks that group similar order-level information. You can hover your cursor over the document to view the available blocks.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1920" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/8_5.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53261"/></figure><p>Click on the + icon at the bottom of the document to add a new block to your document.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1494" height="1598" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/9.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53246" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/9.png 1494w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/9-1280x1369.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/9-980x1048.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/9-480x513.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1494px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="376" height="466" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53247" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10.png 376w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10-242x300.png 242w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10-19x24.png 19w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10-29x36.png 29w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/10-39x48.png 39w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 376px) 100vw, 376px" /></figure><p>Click and hold the drag handles to rearrange a block on the document.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/11.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53249"/></figure><p><br>Hover over a block and select the trash can icon to remove it.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="482" height="284" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/12.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53250" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/12.png 482w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/12-480x283.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 482px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-rows-amp-changing-blocks-nbsp">Document rows &amp; changing blocks&nbsp;</h3><p>As mentioned, document blocks are in rows that take up the entire width of the document. Rows can have a maximum of two blocks.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1720" height="338" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/13.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53271" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/13.png 1720w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/13-1280x252.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/13-980x193.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/13-480x94.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1720px, 100vw" /></figure><p>The only exception is the product table block, which uses the entire width of the row.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1708" height="504" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/14.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53272" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/14.png 1708w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/14-1280x378.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/14-980x289.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/14-480x142.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1708px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-changing-blocks-in-a-double-block-row">Changing blocks in a double-block row</h3><p>You can remove any block in a double-block row to convert it to a single-block row.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1860" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/17.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53278"/></figure><p>To add another block, select the + icon.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1860" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/16.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53275"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customizing-blocks">Customizing blocks</h2><p>When you&#8217;ve selected a block, you can customize some of the appearance and fields shown.&nbsp;</p><p>Each block has specific fields that can be added and removed. Some fields can be further modified by selecting <em>Options.</em>&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-adding-fields-to-a-block">Adding fields to a block</h3><p>Rearrange the fields by clicking and dragging them into the desired position.&nbsp;</p><p>Select the + icon next to the fields below to add them to the block. Use the search bar to narrow down the results for blocks with many available fields.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1860" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/18.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53281"/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-renaming-document-fields">Renaming document fields</h3><p>To change the name of a field on a block, click on the field name and select the pencil icon. Then, type the new name in the field below.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="512" height="578" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/19.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53284" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/19.png 512w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/19-480x542.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 512px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-adjusting-block-amp-product-table-column-widths-nbsp">Adjusting block &amp; product table column widths&nbsp;</h2><p>As mentioned above, each document row can hold up to two blocks. You can adjust the width of the blocks by dragging the dotted block divider line to your desired placement.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="3648" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/15-1.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53285"/></figure><p>For the product table, follow the above steps, click and drag on the column divider to the desired placement.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1848" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/20.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-53286"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-document-block-overview">Document block overview</h2><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Letterhead</h3><p>On this block, you can customize the letterhead for your document.&nbsp;</p><p>If a default letterhead has been set, documents will use the default styling first. You can override the defaults by selecting <em>Use custom</em>.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>To reset the letterhead to the default settings, select <em>Use default letterhead</em>.&nbsp;</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Document title&nbsp;</h3><p>This block allows you to customize the document title, order number, order date, and more.&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Order details</h3><p>The order details block allows you to edit order-level information, such as the customer name, shipping address, payment terms, etc.&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Product table</h3><p>This document block lists the products on the order. To improve visibility, you can add line numbers and stripes to the table. You can add, remove, and rearrange the columns, and they can be further customized by selecting <em>Options.&nbsp;</em></p><p>The product table block displays different information depending on the document type and the order tabs.&nbsp;</p><p>For example, the product table on a pick list document type displays information sourced from the inFlow Pick tab, and the product table on the invoice document type displays information sourced from the inFlow Sales Order tab. </p><p>Columns across order tabs cannot be combined into a single product table.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>The Document Designer will use the default barcode of the product.</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Order Summary</h3><p>This block contains the order totals. To make this block stand out on the document, toggle on <em>Highlight</em> to fill in this section.&nbsp;</p><p>For regions where QR codes are required on invoices, toggle on the QR code setting.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Custom text</h3><p>This block is where you can add a body of text to your document. Use this block to add terms and conditions or any text you don&#8217;t want to copy and paste into each order.&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">HTML/CSS</h3><p>This block type will give you significant control and customization of the document. To learn more, <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css-beta/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">see this guide</a>.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-default is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>At this time, page numbers, per-page headers, and footers aren&#8217;t available on the Document Designer, or via the HTML/CSS blocks.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-completing-a-designed-document">Completing a designed document</h2><p>After designing your document, click <em>Save &amp; close</em>. From here, you can print, email, or create new documents.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2496" height="1294" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/21.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53287" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/21.png 2496w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/21-1280x664.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/21-980x508.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/21-480x249.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2496px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-printing-a-document">Printing a document</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open a sales or purchase order.</li><li>Click <em>Print</em> and select the document. If you have more than one of the same document type be sure to select the desired document.</li><li>Continue through your browser&#8217;s print window to print the document. If you&#8217;d like to save a PDF copy to your computer you can choose the Print to PDF printer.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1886" height="1802" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/22.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53288" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/22.png 1886w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/22-1280x1223.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/22-980x936.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/22-480x459.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1886px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-emailing-a-document">Emailing a document</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open a sales or purchase order.</li><li>Click <em>Email</em> and select the document.</li><li>Fill out the email form, then click <em>Send.&nbsp;</em></li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1898" height="1876" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/23.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53289" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/23.png 1898w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/23-1280x1265.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/23-980x969.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/23-480x474.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1898px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-what-else-can-i-customize-in-inflow">What else can I customize in inFlow? </h2><p>In inFlow, you can customize different areas to meet your team&#8217;s needs.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customizable-inflow-features">Customizable inFlow features </h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-rename-fields/">Rename fields</a>: Rename most of inFlow&#8217;s fields to a term of your choice.</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-customize-my-document-numbers/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Change order numbers</a>: Change order prefixes. </li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-up-custom-fields/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Custom fields</a>: Track additional data with custom fields.</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/print-product-labels-in-inflow/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Label Designer</a>: Create product labels to include the barcode, image, and product name. </li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Document Designer</a>: Create and customize sales and purchasing documents.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2F79Hk0VmJr98%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /> <figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-windows">Windows</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Switching to the Document &amp; Email Designer</strong></h2><p>If you are using inFlow for Windows and want to send documents designed by the Document Designer or have access to email templates, you can seamlessly switch to utilize these powerful features!</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Before you start</strong></h3><p>Switching to inFlow’s Document &amp; <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/customize-email-templates-with-inflows-email-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Email Designer</a> means that some Windows app features will no longer be available, such as:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Documents created in Microsoft Word can be redesigned in inFlow&#8217;s user-friendly <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Document Designer</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>inFlow Print Settings (document styles, document page numbers, and footers)</li><li>Legacy email settings.</li></ul><p>Other notable changes:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Emails will be sent from <a href="mailto:noreply@inflowinventory.com">noreply@inflowinventory.com</a>.</li><li>Documents will be sent as links instead of attachments.&nbsp;</li><li>All document and email templates can only be modified on inFlow for Web.</li></ul><p>If your team has been using inFlow before July 2024, the Email and Document Designer are optional and require inFlow Admins to opt in. We suggest previewing these <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">features in inFlow for Web</a> before making changes.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-warning-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Once you&#8217;ve opted in, you won&#8217;t be able to switch back to using legacy email settings and the original documents from inFlow for Windows. <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/contact-support" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Contact the inFlow team</a> if you have any questions.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-how-to-switch-to-inflow-s-email-and-document-designer">How to switch to inFlow&#8217;s Email and Document Designer</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>To start, open an order in inFlow with an Admin account (sales, purchase order, etc.) &gt; then click <em>Print</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>In the print document screen, click <em>Get the latest.</em></li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2058" height="470" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-10.png" alt="" class="wp-image-61788" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-10.png 2058w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-10-1280x292.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-10-980x224.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-10-480x110.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2058px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="3006" height="2434" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-9.png" alt="" class="wp-image-61789" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-9.png 3006w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-9-1280x1036.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-9-980x794.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-9-480x389.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 3006px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="3"><li>Review the information on-screen, then click <em>Update</em>.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="3002" height="2430" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-7.png" alt="" class="wp-image-61790" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-7.png 3002w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-7-1280x1036.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-7-980x793.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-7-480x389.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 3002px, 100vw" /></figure><p>You&#8217;re all set! You&#8217;re all set! From now on, you&#8217;ll have access to the documents created by the Document Designer and can use the email templates created by the Email Designer.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Order printing with the Document Designer&nbsp;</h2><p>Documents created with the Document Designer can only be edited with <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow for Web</a>, but you can still continue to use inFlow for Windows to print documents. See below for steps.</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open any inFlow order in inFlow, then click <em>Print,</em> then select a document.&nbsp;&nbsp;</li><li>A web browser window will open where you can select <em>Print.</em></li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="3556" height="2568" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-3.png" alt="" class="wp-image-61791" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-3.png 3556w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-3-1280x924.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-3-980x708.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-3-480x347.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 3556px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1965" height="1341" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-61792" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5-1.png 1965w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5-1-1280x874.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5-1-980x669.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/5-1-480x328.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1965px, 100vw" /></figure><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer">How to customize your documents with inFlow&#8217;s Document Designer</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>2</slash:comments></item><item><title>Designing your inFlow documents with HTML/CSS and liquid variables</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Yun Ling]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Tue, 23 Jan 2024 20:37:21 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=50650</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Do you need more control over the document you&#8217;re designing? Use the Custom HTML block to add a section you can customize using HTML/CSS code. Before starting What&#8217;s allowed in the HTML/CSS block This block uses both HTML/CSS and Liquid templating language. The HTML/CSS portion allows you to style the block, whereas Liquid is a [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css">Designing your inFlow documents with HTML/CSS and liquid variables</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<style> .table_left_column_code table td:first-child { font-family:Consolas,Monaco,Lucida Console,Liberation Mono,DejaVu Sans Mono,Bitstream Vera Sans Mono,Courier New !important; }</style><p>Do you need more control over the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-to-customize-your-documents-with-inflows-document-designer/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">document you&#8217;re designing</a>? Use the Custom HTML block to add a section you can customize using HTML/CSS code. </p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-before-starting">Before starting</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-what-s-allowed-in-the-html-css-block">What&#8217;s allowed in the HTML/CSS block</h2><p>This block uses both HTML/CSS and Liquid templating language. The HTML/CSS portion allows you to style the block, whereas Liquid is a simple plain text language for referencing your inFlow data.&nbsp;</p><p>The HTML/CSS code block you provide will be rendered in a separate sandbox context, and therefore, you won&#8217;t have control over certain aspects. </p><p>The entire code block you provide will be appended inside a <code>body </code>tag of a separate HTML document we&#8217;ve defined. As a result, certain tags should not appear in your block. They are <code>html</code> , <code>head</code> , <code>body</code> , and any descendent tags of <code>head</code> such as <code>title</code> , <code>style</code> , <code>link</code> , <code>meta</code> , etc. </p><p>This implies several things. For example, you can&#8217;t control the document title simply by using <code>title</code> . Using the <code>style </code>tag or loading external style sheets using a link may not always work (depending on the browser). So, we recommend styling your document using inline CSS.</p><p>For example:</p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>&lt;h1 style="color:blue;text-align:center;"&gt;This is a heading&lt;/h1&gt;
&lt;p style="color:red;"&gt;This is a paragraph.&lt;/p&gt;</code></pre><p>Inline CSS should be enough most of the time for styling certain parts of a document. If you require more complex styling or need the CSS to be more reusable and flexible, you can define internal CSS using the <code>style</code> tag; however, note that this will produce invalid HTML as it&#8217;s appended inside a body tag later. </p><p>Most browsers are quite forgiving about parsing invalid documents, so your CSS will still be evaluated by those browsers. Still, ensuring that your document&#8217;s styling is consistent across major browsers is important, so we encourage you to use inline CSS instead.</p><p> For security reasons, the following are not allowed in the HTML/CSS block:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>JavaScript</li><li>URLs opening a different web page in the current tab or a new tab <ul class="wp-block-list"><li>You can still add images using the <code>img </code>tag if it&#8217;s pointing to images from other domains. However, any URLs must be in either <code>http </code>or <code>https </code>scheme.</li></ul></li><li><code>form </code>and <code>iframe </code>tags</li></ul><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-liquid-variables-in-inflow">Liquid variables in inFlow</h2><p>Variables are data that are dynamically inserted into the inFlow document. You can think of the variable as a placeholder that gets filled in on a per-order basis.</p><figure class="wp-block-image"><img decoding="async" src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/zKvFft1niHDIckd2nGYH5k9hPqcXt5Q8uO5N5gR7yJBGP6SVu-BhjI-mb_yltlxV7GF1Lqiiw3Q0Ye1Pq11hmFeXgQAagWI-CuvZsHJBzla804FWejNo7YDkaeEab9YirM44iaLwRvNKoqPQ6xFe6K8" alt=""/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-company-info">Company info</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-your-company-details">Your company details</h2><p>These variables below return the information you&#8217;ve to the <em>Company details</em> in the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/global" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow Global settings</a> (Main Menu>Options.)</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{company.name}}&nbsp;</td><td>Your company name.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.address1}}</td><td>The first line of your company address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.address2}}</td><td>The second line of your company address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.city_state}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217; city and state combined.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.city}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s city.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.state}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s state.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.postal_code}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s postal code.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.country}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s country.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.phone}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s phone number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.fax}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s fax number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.email}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s email address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.website}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s website.</td></tr><tr><td>{{company.misc_info}}</td><td>Your company address&#8217;s additional information listed in the Misc. info section.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Your inFlow company information variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-order-variables">Order variables</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-information">Sales order information</h2><p>Use these variables to insert the sales order number and date information. &nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_number}}</td><td>The inFlow sales order number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_date}}</td><td>The sales order date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.requested_ship_date}}</td><td>The requested ship date.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.invoiced_date}}</td><td>The invoiced date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.due_date}}</td><td>The due date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.date_paid}}</td><td>The date paid. If there are multiple payments, this only returns the last date paid.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_date}}</td><td>The sales order return date.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Sales order information variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-purchase-order-information">Purchase order information</h2><p>Use these variables to insert the purchase order number and date information. &nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{po.order_number}}</td><td>The inFlow purchase order number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.order_date}}</td><td>The purchase order date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.requested_ship_date}}</td><td>The requested ship date.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.due_date}}</td><td>The due date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.date_paid}}</td><td>The date paid. If there are multiple payments, this only returns the last date paid.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.return_date}}</td><td>The purchase order return date.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Purchase order information variables </figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customer-details-and-addresses">Customer details and addresses</h2><p>These variables return the customer details as listed on the sales order. Note that this can be different from what&#8217;s stored in the customer record.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.customer.name}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s name as listed in the sales order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.customer.remarks}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s remarks as listed in the customer details.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.customer.tax_exempt_number}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s tax exempt # as listed in the customer details.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.contact_name}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s contact name.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.phone}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s phone number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.email}}</td><td>The customer&#8217;s email address.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_address1}}</td><td>The first line of your customer&#8217;s billing address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_address2}}</td><td>The second line of the billing address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_city_state}}</td><td>The billing address city and state combined.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_city}}</td><td>The billing address city.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_state}}</td><td>The billing address state.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_country}}</td><td>The billing address country.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_postal_code}}</td><td>The billing address postal or zip code.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.billing_address_remarks}}</td><td>The billing address remarks.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.ship_to_company_name}}</td><td>The company name to ship to, if different from the customer&#8217;s name. Used for dropshipping. Set in the &#8220;Care of&#8221; under the shipping address section.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_address1}}</td><td>The first line of your customer&#8217;s shipping address as listed in the sales order.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_address2}}</td><td>The second line of the shipping address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_city}}</td><td>The shipping address city.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_city_state}}</td><td>The shipping address city and state combined.&nbsp;The shipping address city.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_state}}</td><td>The shipping address state.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_country}}</td><td>The shipping address country.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_postal_code}}</td><td>The shipping address postal or zip code.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_address_remarks}}</td><td>The shipping address remarks.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Customer details variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-vendor-details-and-addresses">Vendor details and addresses</h2><p>These variables return the vendor details as listed on the purchase order. Note that this can be different from what&#8217;s stored in the vendor record.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor.name}}</td><td>The vendor&#8217;s name as listed in the purchase order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor.remarks}}</td><td>The vendor remarks as listed in the vendor details.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.contact_name}}</td><td>The vendor&#8217;s contact name.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.phone}}</td><td>The vendor&#8217;s phone number.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.email}}</td><td>The vendor&#8217;s email address.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_address1}}</td><td>The first line of your vendor&#8217;s billing address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_address2}}</td><td>The second line of the billing address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_city_state}}</td><td>The billing address city and state combined.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_city}}</td><td>The billing address city.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_state}}</td><td>The billing address state.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_country}}</td><td>The billing address country.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_postal_code}}</td><td>The billing address postal or zip code.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_address_remarks}}</td><td>The billing address remarks.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_company_name}}</td><td>The company name as listed in the ship-to address on the purchase order. </td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_address1}}</td><td>The first line of ship-to address as listed in the purchase order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_address2}}</td><td>The second line of the ship-to address.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_city}}</td><td>The ship-to address city. &nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_city_state}}</td><td>The ship-to address city and state combined.&nbsp;.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_state}}</td><td>The ship-to address state.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.ship_to_country}}</td><td>The ship-to address remarks.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Vendor details variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-overall-totals">Overall totals</h2><p>Use these for the overall totals, which <strong>include </strong>any returned/refunded amounts.&nbsp;The following listed are for sales orders. However, you can get the equivalent for a purchase order just by replacing <code>so </code>with <code>po </code>(e.g. <code>{{po.subtotal}}</code> is the purchase order&#8217;s subtotal amount). </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.subtotal}}</td><td>The overall subtotal amount.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.tax1_name}}</td><td>The name of the primary tax.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.tax1}}</td><td>The overall primary tax amount.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.tax2_name}}</td><td>The name of the secondary tax.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.tax2}}</td><td>The overall secondary tax amount.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.freight}}</td><td>The overall freight amount.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.total}}</td><td>The overall total amount.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.amount_paid}}</td><td>The overall amount paid.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.balance}}</td><td>The overall balance.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.credit}}</td><td>The overall amount to refund.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Overall totals variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-order-totals">Order totals</h2><p>These variables return the order totals, <strong>excluding </strong>any refunds. The following listed are for sales orders. However, you can get the equivalent for a purchase order just by replacing <code>so </code>with <code>po </code>(e.g. <code>{{po.order_sub_total}}</code> is the purchase order&#8217;s subtotal amount excluding any refunds). </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_sub_total}}</td><td>The order subtotal on the sales tab not including any returns.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_tax1}}</td><td>The primary tax amount.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_tax2}}</td><td>The secondary tax amount.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_freight}}</td><td>The freight amount.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_total}}</td><td>The total amount.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Order totals variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-return-totals">Return totals</h2><p>These variables concern the return/refund amounts only. The following listed are for sales orders. However, you can get the equivalent for a purchase order just by replacing <code>so </code>with <code>po </code>(e.g. <code>{{po.return_sub_total}}</code> is the purchase order&#8217;s return subtotal amount). </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_sub_total}}</td><td>The subtotal amount on the Return tab.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_tax1}}</td><td>The primary tax amount on the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_tax2}}</td><td>The secondary tax amount on the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_freight}}</td><td>The freight amount on the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_total}}</td><td>The total amount on the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_fee}}</td><td>The fee amount on the Return tab.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Return totals variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-additional-order-details">Additional order details</h2><p>These are additional details in the sales order.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{so.sales_rep}}</td><td>The sales representative for the sales order.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.po_number}}</td><td>Your customer&#8217;s P.O. number listed on this sales order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.payment_terms}}</td><td>The payment terms set for this sales order.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.exchange_rate}}</td><td>The exchange rate between order currency and home currency..</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.payment_method}}</td><td>The payment method used for this order. If there are multiple payments of different methods, this only returns the first payment method used</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.order_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Sales Order tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.picking_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Pick tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.shipping_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Ship tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.return_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.restock_remarks))</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Restock tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.payment_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the first entry of the Payment details popup.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.weight}}</td><td>The total weight of products in this sales order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.volume}}</td><td>The total volume of products in this sales order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{so.quantity}}</td><td>The total quantity of products in this sales order, in standard UoM.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Additional sales order details variables</figcaption></figure><p>These are additional order details for the purchase order. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{po.vendor_order_number}}</td><td>Your vendor&#8217;s order number listed on this purchase order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.payment_terms}}</td><td>The payment terms set for this purchase order.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.exchange_rate}}</td><td>The exchange rate between the purchase order currency and home currency..</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.payment_method}}</td><td>The payment method used for this order. If there are multiple payments of different methods, this only returns the first payment method used.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.order_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Purchase Order tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.receive_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Receive tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.return_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Return tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.unstock_remarks))</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the Restock tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.payment_remarks}}</td><td>The information listed in the Remarks section in the first entry of the Payment details popup.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.weight}}</td><td>The total weight of products in this purchase order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.volume}}</td><td>The total volume of products in this purchase order.</td></tr><tr><td>{{po.quantity}}</td><td>The total quantity of products in this purchase order, in standard UoM.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Additional purchase order details variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-product-variables">Product variables</h2><p>Since a document could contain more than one product, to display this properly, you&#8217;d need to use a loop. It essentially runs that bit of code for every product in the document.&nbsp;&nbsp;If you want the product information to be listed in a table format, you&#8217;ll need to incorporate the loop into an HTML table. </p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>{% for line in so.lines %} {{ line.name }}
{% endfor %}</code></pre><p>The <code>so.lines</code> object specified in the beginning of the loop may differ depending on which information you want to show. In this case, it refers to any variables in the main Sales Order tab of a sales order. For information in the Pick tab (e.g., location, sublocation), you&#8217;ll need to specify a different object. The available objects and their variables are listed in the following sections.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-product-information">Product information</h2><p>This is a list of product variables that remain the same throughout the different objects. Typically these are the identifiers such as name, SKU, etc. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.name}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s name.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.description}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s description.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.sku}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s SKU.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.vendor_product_code}}</td><td>The vendor product code as listed in the purchase order. </td></tr><tr><td>{{line.image_url}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s image.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.category}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s category.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.barcode}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s barcode.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.barcode_format}}</td><td>The format of the product&#8217;s barcode (e.g. Code 128, UPC, or EAN). </td></tr><tr><td>{{line.dimensions}}</td><td>The product dimensions (length x width x height).&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_weight}}</td><td>The product weight for a single unit.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_volume}}</td><td>The product volume for a single unit.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.line_num}}</td><td>The line number for the product.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Product information variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-order-lines">Order lines</h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the main <strong>Sales Order</strong> tab of a sales order. Your loop should use the <code>so.lines</code> object for a sales order, or <code>po.lines</code> for a purchase order. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.quantity}}</td><td>The product quantity as listed in the sales order tab. Includes the sales or purchase unit of measure (depending on if your object is the sales order or purchase order object).</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.unit_price}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s unit price. This amount does not include any discounts.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.unit_price_with_discount}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s discounted unit price.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.subtotal}}</td><td>The product subtotal.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.tax_code}}</td><td>The product&#8217;s tax code (&#8220;Taxable&#8221;, &#8220;Non-taxable&#8221;, etc.)</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_total_weight}}</td><td>The total weight for the product based on the quantity in the sales order tab.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_total_volume}}</td><td>The total volume for the product based on the quantity in the sales order tab.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Order line variables</figcaption></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="444" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lLMfof8Fzv.png" alt="" class="wp-image-50707" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lLMfof8Fzv.png 837w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lLMfof8Fzv-480x255.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 837px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Example table for sales order lines:</p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>&lt;table style="width:50%"&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;th style="text-align: left"&gt;SKU&lt;/th&gt; &lt;th style="text-align: left"&gt;Qty&lt;/th&gt; &lt;th style="text-align: right"&gt;Subtotal&lt;/th&gt; &lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; {% for line in so.lines %} &lt;td&gt;{{line.SKU}}&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;{{ line.quantity }}&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td style="text-align:right"&gt; {{line.subtotal}}&lt;/tr&gt;
{% endfor %}
&lt;/table&gt;</code></pre><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-pick-lines-purchase-order-receive-lines">Sales Order Pick lines / Purchase Order Receive lines</h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the <strong>Pick </strong>or <strong>Fulfill</strong> tab of a sales order or the <strong>Receive</strong> tab of a purchase order. For this, your loop should use the <code>so.pick_lines</code> object for a sales order, or <code>po.receive_lines</code> for a purchase order.</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.quantity}}</td><td>The quantity as listed in the pick, fulfill, or receive tab. Includes the unit of measure.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.location}}</td><td>The location that the product was picked from / received to.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.sublocation}}</td><td>The sublocation that the product was picked from / received to.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_total_weight}}</td><td>The total weight for the product based on the quantity in the respective tabs.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.item_total_volume}}</td><td>The total volume for the product based on the quantity in the respective tabs.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Order pick / receive lines variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-pack-lines">Sales Order Pack lines </h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the ship tab of a sales order. For this, your loop should use the <code>so.pack_lines</code> object instead. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.quantity}}</td><td>The product quantity as listed in the ship tab. Includes the unit of measure.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.box_number}}</td><td>The box number the product was packed into.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Sales order pack lines variables </figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-ship-lines">Sales Order Ship lines </h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the shipping details in a sales order. For this, your loop should use the <code>so.ship_lines</code> object instead. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.containers}}</td><td>The box numbers.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.shipped_date}}</td><td>The shipment&#8217;s ship date.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.carrier}}</td><td>The shipment&#8217;s carrier.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.tracking_number}}</td><td>The shipment&#8217;s tracking number.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Sales order ship lines variables</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-purchase-order-return-lines">Sales Order / Purchase Order Return lines </h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the <strong>Return </strong>tab in a sales order or purchase order. For this, your loop should use the <code>so.return_lines</code> object for a sales order, or <code>po.return_lines</code> object for a purchase order. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.quantity}}</td><td>The product quantity as listed in the return tab. Includes the unit of measure.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.return_date}}</td><td>The date the product was returned.</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-restock-purchase-order-unstock-lines">Sales Order Restock / Purchase Order Unstock lines </h2><p>This is the list of available product variables specific to the <strong>Restock </strong>tab in a sales order or the <strong>Unstock</strong> tab in a purchase order. For this, your loop should use the <code>so.restock_lines</code> object for a sales order, or <code>po.unstock_lines</code> object for a purchase order.</p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.quantity}}</td><td>The quantity as listed in the Restock tab / Unstock tab. Includes the unit of measure.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.location}}</td><td>The location that the product was restocked to / unstocked from.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.sublocation}}</td><td>The sublocation that the product was restocked to / unstocked from.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.restock_date}}</td><td>The date the product was restocked.</td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Order restock/unstock lines variables.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-other-variables">Other variables </h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-payment-lines">Payment lines</h2><p>This is the list of available variables specific to the payment details of a sales order or purchase order. Your loop should use the <code>so.payment_lines</code> object for a sales order, or <code>po.payment_lines</code> for a purchase order. </p><figure class="wp-block-table table_left_column_code"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variable</strong></td><td><strong>Description</strong></td></tr><tr><td>{{line.date_paid}}</td><td>The date of a payment.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.amount}}</td><td>The amount of the payment. </td></tr><tr><td>{{line.payment_method}}</td><td>The payment method of a payment.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.reference_number}}</td><td>The reference number of a payment.</td></tr><tr><td>{{line.remarks}}</td><td>The remarks of a payment. </td></tr></tbody></table><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Order payment details variables.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-serials">Serials</h2><p>For products that have serial numbers, you&#8217;ll need to use a loop again with the <code>line.serials</code> object. </p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>{% for line in line.serials %} {{ serial }}
{% endfor %}</code></pre><p>Example:</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="500" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/chrome_TDwfCmqucs.png" alt="" class="wp-image-53360" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/chrome_TDwfCmqucs.png 827w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/chrome_TDwfCmqucs-480x290.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 827px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-custom-fields-variables">Custom fields variables</h2><p>These are the variables corresponding to the information you&#8217;ve set up under <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/global" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow&#8217;s Global settings</a>. (Main Menu &gt;<em>Options</em> &gt; <em>Custom fields</em>. )</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>There are two types of variables: one for the name of the field (e.g. Alternate Contact), and the other for its value in the sales order (e.g. Jane, John, etc.)&nbsp;</p></blockquote><p>There are ten custom fields available for sales orders, customers, purchase orders, vendors, and products. The formatting is similar for each.</p><p><code>{{so.custom_name1}}</code>, <code>{{so.custom_name2}}</code>, &#8230; <code>{{so.custom_name10}}</code><br>The names of the sales order custom field as set up in your settings.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="916" height="578" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/CF.png" alt="" class="wp-image-55234" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/CF.png 916w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/CF-480x303.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 916px, 100vw" /></figure><p><code>{{so.custom1}}</code>, <code>{{so.custom2}}</code>,&nbsp;&#8230; <code>{{so.custom10}}</code><br>The values of the sales order are custom fields as they appear in the sales order.</p><p><code>{{so.customer.custom_name1}}</code>, <code>{{so.customer.custom_name2}}</code>, &#8230; <code>{{so.customer.custom_name10}}</code><br>The names of the customer custom fields as set up in your settings.</p><p><code>{{so.customer.custom1}}</code>, <code>{{so.customer.custom2}}</code>,&nbsp;&#8230; <code>{{so.customer.custom10}}</code><br>The values of the customer custom fields as they appear in the sales order.</p><p><code>{{po.custom_name1}}</code>, <code>{{po.custom_name2}}</code>, &#8230; <code>{{po.custom_name10}}</code><br>The names of the purchase order custom field as set up in your settings.</p><p><code>{{po.custom1}}</code>, <code>{{po.custom2}}</code>,&nbsp;&#8230; <code>{{po.custom10}}</code><br>The values of the purchase order are custom fields as they appear in the purchase order.</p><p><code>{{po.vendor.custom_name1}}</code>, <code>{{po.vendor.custom_name2}}</code>, &#8230; <code>{{po.vendor.custom_name10}}</code><br>The names of the vendor custom fields as set up in your settings.</p><p><code>{{po.vendor.custom1}}</code>, <code>{{po.vendor.custom2}}</code>,&nbsp;&#8230; <code>{{po.vendor.custom10}}</code><br>The values of the vendor custom fields as they appear in the purchase order.</p><p><code>{{line.custom_name1}}</code>, <code>{{line.custom_name2}}</code>, &#8230; <code>{{line.custom_name10}}</code><br>The names of the product custom fields as set up in your settings.</p><p><code>{{line.custom1}}</code>, <code>{{line.custom2}}</code>,&nbsp;&#8230; <code>{{line.custom10}}</code><br>The values of the product custom fields as they appear in the order.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-quantity-and-pricing-details-options">Quantity and pricing details options</h2><p>There are some additional options to customize the way your quantities and prices are displayed. </p><p>&nbsp;<code>{{line.quantity_details.standard_quantity}}</code><br>The quantity in the standard unit of measure. For example,&nbsp; if you sold the product in packs of 5 units, this would return 5 instead of 1, 10 instead of 2, etc.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p><code>{{line.quantity_details.uom_quantity}}&nbsp;</code><br>The quantity in the sales or purchase unit of measure. Whether the sales or the purchase unit of measure shows up depends on whether it&#8217;s a sales or purchase document. </p><p><code>{{line.quantity_details.uom}}</code><br>The product sales or purchase unit of measure (without any quantities).</p><p><code>{{line.discount_details.pretty}}</code><br>The line item discount, formatted in % or $ depending on the order: e.g., 10% or $10</p><p><code>{{line.unit_price_details.pretty_with_iso_code}}</code><br>The product unit price with ISO code instead of currency symbol: e.g., USD 89.99 instead of $89.99</p><p><code>{{line.unit_price_with_discount_details.pretty_with_iso_code}}</code><br>The discounted product unit price, with ISO code instead of the currency symbol.</p><p><code>{{line.subtotal_details.pretty_with_iso_code}}</code><br>The product subtotal with ISO code instead of the currency symbol.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-format-tips">Format tips</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-date-formatting">Date formatting</h2><p>The dates and timestamps will show in a format following your browser locale. To change the way this looks, use a filter ( | ) along with the variable.</p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code><code>{{so.order_date | date: "MMM dd, yyyy" }}</code></code></pre><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="233" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_W4lX37N3cv.png" alt="" class="wp-image-50703" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_W4lX37N3cv.png 834w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_W4lX37N3cv-480x134.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 834px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-image-formatting">Image formatting</h2><p>To adjust the image size and other formatting, you&#8217;ll need to apply some CSS. </p><p>Example: </p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>&lt;img src={{line.image_url}} style="width:48px; height:48px; vertical-align: middle; margin-right:16px" /&gt;</code></pre><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="406" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lBHlq8m6yo.png" alt="" class="wp-image-50715" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lBHlq8m6yo.png 822w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/chrome_lBHlq8m6yo-480x237.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 822px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Barcodes</h2><p>Dynamic Code 39 barcodes for scanning text and Liquid variables can be generated and displayed through the HTML/CSS block.</p><p>Our scanning hardware currently only supports barcodes composed of the <a href="https://www.barcodefaq.com/1d/code-39/#ReadingC39" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">43 characters listed here</a>. Any characters from the <a href="https://www.barcodefaq.com/1d/code-39/#Extended_Code_39" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">extended set</a>, including lowercase letters, will not be scanned correctly.</p><p>Example snippet to display the SO order number as a Code 39 barcode:</p><pre class="wp-block-code"><code>&lt;link href='https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Libre Barcode 39' rel='stylesheet'&gt;
&lt;style&gt;
bc { font-size: xx-large; font-family: "Libre Barcode 39";
}
&lt;/style&gt;
&lt;bc&gt;*{{so.order_number}}*&lt;/bc&gt;</code></pre><p>Dynamic Code 128 barcodes are not supported in the HTML/CSS block because of the extra encoding logic needed to convert text to a scannable Code 128 barcode.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-html-css-and-liquid-resources">HTML, CSS, and liquid resources</h2><p>There are many guides on these languages. Here&#8217;s some to get you started:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li><a href="https://www.w3schools.com/html/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">HTML</a></li><li><a href="https://www.w3schools.com/html/html_css.asp" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">HTML/CSS inline</a></li><li><a href="https://shopify.github.io/liquid/basics/introduction/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Liquid</a></li></ul><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css">Designing your inFlow documents with HTML/CSS and liquid variables</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/designing-your-inflow-document-with-html-css/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>How to charge a customer in a different currency</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 17 Jan 2024 13:09:10 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency-2</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>If you sell to customers who use a different currency, it can be difficult to keep track of their payments. However, with inFlow, you can easily manage these transactions. Take a look below to learn more! Web Currencies and pricing schemes&#160; In inFlow pricing schemes are specific to the currency being used. The default pricing [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency">How to charge a customer in a different currency</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>If you sell to customers who use a different currency, it can be difficult to keep track of their payments. However, with inFlow, you can easily manage these transactions. Take a look below to learn more!</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab">Web</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Currencies and pricing schemes&nbsp;</h2><p>In inFlow <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-give-special-pricing-for-wholesale-vip-etc/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">pricing schemes</a> are specific to the currency being used. The default pricing schemes are in your home currency.</p><p>However, if you need to charge your customers in another currency, you can easily do so by selecting the appropriate pricing scheme in the Pricing/Currency section located at the bottom left of your order.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2096" height="1758" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/1-3.png" alt="" class="wp-image-49918" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/1-3.png 2096w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/1-3-1280x1074.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/1-3-980x822.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/1-3-480x403.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2096px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How to add a currency/pricing scheme</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Go to the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/orders" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow Order settings</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>Select <em>Pricing schemes.</em></li><li>Click on <em>Add new pricing scheme.</em> Type in the name of the pricing scheme, select if it should be tax-inclusive or not, and select the currency from the drop-down menu.&nbsp;</li><li>Select the star icon next to one of the pricing schemes to make it the default in inFlow. Click <em>Save</em> when done.&nbsp;</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How can I track exchange rates on sales orders?</h2><p>If your team uses multiple currencies when selling, inFlow will pull the latest exchange rates on your sales orders automatically.&nbsp;</p><p>Just select a different currency from the <em>Pricing/Currency </em>drop-down menu, and inFlow will display the latest rate below.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1236" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/1-1.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-50430"/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Team members with sales order editing access can select the blue icon with the white arrow to save this currency preference to the customer record.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How can I update the exchange rate on an open sales order?</h2><p>After creating the order, inFlow will continue to pull the latest exchange rates. If you want the sales order to use an updated rate, click on the circular arrows next to the exchange rate to refresh it.&nbsp;</p><p>Refreshing the exchange rate won&#8217;t change the prices or balance on the sales order in the selected currency. The exchange rate updates are shown on the Sales Order Profit Report</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="322" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/3-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-50448" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/3-1.png 862w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/3-1-480x179.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 862px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How often does inFlow update the exchange rate?</h2><p>inFlow will pull new rates daily from Open Exchange Rates.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How can I manually set the exchange rate?</h2><p>If you prefer to set the exchange rate yourself, select the grey exchange rate field and select <em>Set custom exchange rate.</em></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1236" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/3.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-50434"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How can I add custom exchange rates to inFlow?</h2><p>You can add custom exchange rates for currencies that will be available across inFlow.&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Go to the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/global" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Global inFlow settings</a>.&nbsp;&nbsp;</li><li>Select <em>Currency and exchange rates.</em></li><li>Click on <em>Add custom exchange rate.&nbsp;</em></li><li>Select a currency from the list, then click <em>Next</em>.</li></ol><p>Type in the exchange rate, then click <em>Save </em>when done.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-large"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="869" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/4-1024x869.png" alt="" class="wp-image-50435" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/4-980x832.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/01/4-480x408.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1024px, 100vw" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-default is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>To remove custom rates and have inFlow pull up-to-date exchange rates, select <em>Set all to automatic.</em></p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab">Windows</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Currencies and pricing schemes</h2><p>In inFlow <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-give-special-pricing-for-wholesale-vip-etc/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">pricing schemes</a> are specific to the currency being used. The default pricing schemes are in your home currency.</p><p>However, if you need to charge your customers in another currency, you can easily do so by selecting the appropriate pricing scheme in the Pricing/Currency section located at the bottom left of your order.&nbsp;</p><p>If you don&#8217;t have a pricing scheme for that currency, you can create one directly from the sales order screen.</p><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2014/05/38914340_1.png" alt="38914340_1" class="wp-image-15361"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">How to add a currency/pricing scheme</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click the drop-down beside <em>Pricing/Currency.</em></li><li>Choose <em>Add New Pricing Scheme</em>&nbsp;from the list.</li><li>Within the resulting window, you can add another pricing scheme and select the correct currency.</li><li>Click <em>Save &amp; Close.</em></li><li>If it is not already included, enter the conversion ratio from this currency to your home currency.</li><li>Re-select your scheme to convert your prices.</li></ol><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency">How to charge a customer in a different currency</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-charge-my-customer-in-a-different-currency/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>What do the order symbols mean?</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/what-do-the-order-symbols-mean</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/what-do-the-order-symbols-mean#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 06 Jul 2023 18:37:47 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=45785</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Using inFlow, you may notice symbols next to products on orders. Please take a look below to see what they mean. Web Empty circle An empty circle next to a product means the product has been ordered but not yet picked, shipped, or fulfilled. Semi-filled circle A semi-filled circle circle next to a product means [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/what-do-the-order-symbols-mean">What do the order symbols mean?</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Using inFlow, you may notice symbols next to products on orders. Please take a look below to see what they mean. </p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-web">Web</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-empty-circle">Empty circle</h2><p>An empty circle next to a product means the product has been ordered but not yet picked, shipped, or fulfilled.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1374" height="177" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image.png" alt="" class="wp-image-60262" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image.png 1374w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1280x165.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-980x126.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-480x62.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1374px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-semi-filled-circle">Semi-filled circle</h2><p>A semi-filled circle circle next to a product means it has been picked, but not yet shipped. This status only exists on orders that have shipping enabled.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1376" height="171" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-60263" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1.png 1376w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1-1280x159.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1-980x122.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1-480x60.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1376px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-filled-circle">Filled circle</h2><p>A filled circle next to a product means it has been shipped or fulfilled.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1372" height="168" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-60264" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2.png 1372w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2-1280x157.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2-980x120.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2-480x59.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1372px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-red-exclamation">Red exclamation</h2><p>If you see a&nbsp;<strong>red</strong>&nbsp;exclamation mark, you do not have enough stock in the specified location to fulfill this current order.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1148" height="158" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/webred.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40912" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/webred.png 1148w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/webred-980x135.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/webred-480x66.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1148px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-yellow-exclamation">Yellow exclamation</h2><p>If you see a&nbsp;<strong>yellow</strong>&nbsp;exclamation mark, you have enough stock for this order&nbsp;<strong>only</strong> but not enough for any other open orders for this item. It&#8217;s a good idea to reorder if you see this icon.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1148" height="157" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_yellow_1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40915" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_yellow_1.png 1148w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_yellow_1-980x134.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_yellow_1-480x66.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1148px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-clock-symbol">Clock symbol</h2><p>If you see a&nbsp;<strong>clock </strong>symbol&nbsp;on the order screen, that means that you&#8217;ve already ordered this item from your vendor and you&#8217;re just waiting to receive/complete the order, so you&#8217;ll have enough stock. You should not need to reorder again if you see this icon (otherwise, you&#8217;ll end up with double the amount).</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1152" height="153" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_clock_1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40916" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_clock_1.png 1152w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_clock_1-980x130.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/web_clock_1-480x64.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1152px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-arrow-save-symbol">Arrow/save symbol</h2><p>If you see an arrow symbol, it means a change was made to an order. Clicking on this symbol allows you to save the changes back to the original record. </p><p>Example: </p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>The product ¾&#8221; Gates Valve &#8211; Brass has a unit price of $15.</li><li>On sales order SO-000013, the unit price was changed from $15 to $17. </li><li>After the price change, the save-back icon will be available on the sales order.</li><li>If you select the save back symbol, inFlow will update the unit price on the product record for ¾&#8221; Gates Valve to $17.</li><li>If you don&#8217;t select the save back symbol, the unit price on the product record will remain $15, and the price on sales order SO-000013 will be $17. </li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1618" height="348" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back.png" alt="" class="wp-image-51783" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back.png 1618w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-1280x275.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-980x211.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-480x103.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1618px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1748" height="1596" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-51784" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-2.png 1748w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-2-1280x1169.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-2-980x895.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/save-back-2-480x438.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1748px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-manufacture-order-statuses-web">Manufacture order statuses (Web)</h2><p>On a manufacture order (MO), there are a few different statuses next to assemblies. Take a look below to learn about the different statues and the bullet points that explain why you&#8217;d see them on the MO.</p><p></p><p><strong><em>Please note: Manufacture orders are only available on inFlow plans with the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/software-pricing" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">BOM + Manufacturing add-on</a>.&nbsp;</em></strong></p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-blocked">Blocked</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>This is shown at the top-level subassemblies when there aren&#8217;t enough raw materials in stock.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1746" height="690" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/16-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48598" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/16-1.png 1746w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/16-1-1280x506.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/16-1-980x387.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/16-1-480x190.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1746px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-start">Start</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Subassemblies are ready to build.&nbsp;</li><li>Prior subassemblies have been made, and they&#8217;re ready to be used in the next assembly.&nbsp;</li><li>Raw materials/components are in stock and ready for picking and assembly.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1792" height="304" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/17-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48602" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/17-1.png 1792w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/17-1-1280x217.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/17-1-980x166.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/17-1-480x81.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1792px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-continue">Continue</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>For assemblies in progress.&nbsp;</li><li>Some of the raw materials have been picked.</li><li>The assembly process has started but hasn&#8217;t been marked as done.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1740" height="190" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/18-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48603" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/18-1.png 1740w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/18-1-1280x140.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/18-1-980x107.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/18-1-480x52.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1740px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-assemble">Assemble</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Subassemblies will have this status when there aren&#8217;t any raw materials left to pick.&nbsp;</li><li>This stage means you have everything ready to start building.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1746" height="210" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/19.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48604" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/19.png 1746w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/19-1280x154.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/19-980x118.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/19-480x58.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1746px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-done">Done</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>When all raw materials have been picked, operations and subassemblies are completed.&nbsp;</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1564" height="192" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/20.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48606" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/20.png 1564w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/20-1280x157.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/20-980x120.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/20-480x59.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1564px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-not-enough">Not enough</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>This status is for raw materials that aren&#8217;t in stock.&nbsp;</li><li>Click on <em>Not enough</em> to reorder stock.&nbsp;</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2188" height="264" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/21.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48610" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/21.png 2188w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/21-1280x154.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/21-980x118.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/21-480x58.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2188px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-low-stock">Low stock</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>This is shown for products that are on multiple orders, but there isn&#8217;t enough stock to complete/fulfill them all.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</li><li>Click on Low stock to reorder.&nbsp;</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2376" height="356" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/22.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48612" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/22.png 2376w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/22-1280x192.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/22-980x147.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/22-480x72.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2376px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-waiting-nbsp">Waiting&nbsp;</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>This status is for products you don&#8217;t have in stock but are waiting on an incoming order.</li><li>Products can be reordered from a purchase order, stock transfer, or manufacture order.&nbsp;</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1522" height="260" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/23-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-48615" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/23-1.png 1522w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/23-1-1280x219.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/23-1-980x167.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/23-1-480x82.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1522px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-windows">Windows</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-red-nbsp-exclamation">Red&nbsp;exclamation</h2><p>If you see a <strong>red</strong> exclamation mark, it means you do not have enough stock in the specified location to fulfill this current order.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1096" height="85" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/redsign.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40910" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/redsign.png 1096w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/redsign-980x76.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/redsign-480x37.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1096px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-yellow-nbsp-exclamation">Yellow&nbsp;exclamation</h2><p>If you see a <strong>yellow</strong> exclamation mark, it means that you do have enough stock for this order <strong>only</strong> but not enough for any other open orders for this item. It&#8217;s a good idea to reorder if you see this icon.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1100" height="84" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/yellow.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40911" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/yellow.png 1100w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/yellow-980x75.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/yellow-480x37.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1100px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-clock-symbol-0">Clock symbol</h2><p>If you see a <strong>clock </strong>symbol on the order screen, that means that you&#8217;ve already ordered this item from your vendor and you&#8217;re just waiting to receive/complete the order, so you&#8217;ll have enough stock. You should not need to reorder again if you see this icon (otherwise, you&#8217;ll end up with double the amount).</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1098" height="83" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/clock-sign1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-40909" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/clock-sign1.png 1098w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/clock-sign1-980x74.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/08/clock-sign1-480x36.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1098px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-arrow-save-symbol-0">Arrow/save symbol</h2><p>If you see a black save symbol, it means a change was made to an order. Clicking on this symbol allows you to save the changes back to the original record. </p><p>Example: </p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>The product ¾&#8221; Gates Valve &#8211; Brass has a unit price of $15.</li><li>On sales order SO-000013, the unit price was changed from $15 to $17. </li><li>After the price change, the save-back icon will be available on the sales order.</li><li>If you select the save back symbol, inFlow will update the unit price on the product record for ¾&#8221; Gates Valve to $17.</li><li>If you don&#8217;t select the save back symbol, the unit price on the product record will remain $15, and the price on sales order SO-000013 will be $17. </li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1306" height="398" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/windows-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-51787" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/windows-1.png 1306w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/windows-1-1280x390.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/windows-1-980x299.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/windows-1-480x146.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1306px, 100vw" /></figure><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/what-do-the-order-symbols-mean">What do the order symbols mean?</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/what-do-the-order-symbols-mean/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>How to create customers in inFlow</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 14 Jun 2023 16:17:38 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>In inFlow, you can manage your sales and maintain a complete list of customers. See below for more details! Web Creating new customers Interested in importing your customers in bulk? Check out our guide on importing data here! Error when creating new customers If you see the error &#8220;This customer name is already in use&#8221;, [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow">How to create customers in inFlow</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>In inFlow, you can manage your sales and maintain a complete list of customers. See below for more details!</p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-web">Web</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-new-customers">Creating new customers</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the <em><a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/homepage" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Homepage</a></em>, click on Main menu > <em>New customer.</em></li><li>Fill out the <em>Customer Name</em>, then click <em>Create</em>.</li><li>When the newly made customer record opens, add any information that you have for this customer.</li><li>Click <em>Save</em> when done.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1272" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/new-customer.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-54600"/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Interested in importing your customers in bulk? Check out our <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-import-data-to-inflow" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">guide on importing data here</a>! </p></blockquote><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-error-when-creating-new-customers">Error when creating new customers</h3><p>If you see the error &#8220;This customer name is already in use&#8221;, it&#8217;s likely this customer already exists.</p><p>inFlow doesn&#8217;t allow you to have more than one customer with the same name. To fix this, you can <a href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-find-hiddendeactivated-products/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">reactivate the customer record</a>.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Customer summary</h2><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Customer details</h3><p>The customer&#8217;s name and contact information are at the top of a customer record. You can edit the customer details by selecting any of the fields.&nbsp;</p><p>To the right of the profile is the customer&#8217;s financial information, which displays their balance and credits. These fields automatically update as changes are made to their sales orders.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1834" height="442" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-8.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54562" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-8.png 1834w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-8-1280x308.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-8-980x236.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/1-8-480x116.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1834px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Below the customer details, select <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-up-custom-fields/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener"><em>Add custom fields</em></a> to add up to 10 type-in fields to track information that inFlow doesn&#8217;t track by default.&nbsp;</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Custom fields with the same title can be linked between customer and sales order records, eliminating the need for manual entry and allowing for shared display of information.</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading">How are balance, credit, and due amounts calculated?</h3><p>As mentioned, these amounts can&#8217;t be manually changed. Look below to understand how inFlow calculates these figures.</p><figure class="wp-block-table is-style-stripes"><table><thead><tr><th><strong>Term</strong></th><th><strong>Explanation</strong></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Balance</td><td>This is the total funds your customer must pay for all sales orders, whether invoiced or uninvoiced.</td></tr><tr><td>Credit</td><td>This represents the unused credits provided to the customer for the previous refund on a sales order.</td></tr><tr><td>Due</td><td>Located in the payment history tab, due shows how much your customer owes on orders marked as invoiced or partially paid within the <strong>selected date range</strong>, as well as on older unpaid orders.</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Customer record action bar</h3><p>Above the customer details section are the buttons for printing, emailing, and more. </p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1960" height="556" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-8.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54564" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-8.png 1960w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-8-1280x363.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-8-980x278.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-8-480x136.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1960px, 100vw" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-table is-style-stripes"><table><tbody><tr><td>Deactivate</td><td>Select this button to make the customer record <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-find-hiddendeactivated-products/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inactive in inFlow</a>.</td></tr><tr><td>Attachments&nbsp;</td><td><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-add-attachments-products-customers-vendors-orders/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">To upload files</a> to the customer record.</td></tr><tr><td>Create new SO</td><td>A shortcut to <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">create a new sales order</a> for this customer.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>Copy</td><td>Select this button to create a duplicate customer record.</td></tr><tr><td>Print</td><td>Select this button to <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-print-a-customer-statement-showing-invoices-payments-and-balances/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">print a customer statement</a> document.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td>Email</td><td>Use this button to <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-email-invoices-and-other-documents-directly-from-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">email a customer statement</a> document to a customer.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-overview-tab">Overview tab</h2><p>This tab allows you to add more details for the customer. Below is a breakdown of the Overview fields.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1842" height="830" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-2-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54563" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-2-1.png 1842w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-2-1-1280x577.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-2-1-980x442.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/2-2-1-480x216.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1842px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-addresses">Addresses</h3><p>This section allows you to add customer addresses. To add new addresses, click Add new. You can set the address type and also set an address as the default billing or shipping address.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-preferences">Preferences</h3><p>This section is for setting general preferences for your customer. This includes:&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Location</li><li>Carrier</li><li>Default sales rep</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-purchasing-info">Purchasing Info</h3><p>This is where you can enter the customer&#8217;s financial-related information. This includes:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Pricing/currency</li><li>Discount</li><li>Payment terms</li><li>Default payment method</li><li>Taxing scheme</li><li>Tax-exempt #</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-remarks">Remarks</h3><p>This field is where you can leave internal notes about the customer. All <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/teammember-access-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">team members with access</a> to customer records will be able to view the remarks field.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-order-history-tab">Order History tab</h2><p>This tab lists the last 100 orders that this customer has made, listed from newest to oldest.&nbsp;</p><p>If you&#8217;d like a full list, take a look at the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/reports/customer-order-history" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Customer order history report</a>.&nbsp;<br></p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Note: Team members with restricted location access can only see orders that are in the location(s) they have access.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1998" height="598" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-3-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54574" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-3-2.png 1998w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-3-2-1280x383.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-3-2-980x293.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-3-2-480x144.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1998px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Payment history tab&nbsp;</h2><p>As a business owner, it&#8217;s important to have a quick view of your customer&#8217;s payment history to help you track outstanding invoices.&nbsp;</p><p>The payment history tab allows you to track the last 100 transactions with your customer. If there are more than 100 entries, you can view the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/reports/customer-payment-details">Customer Payment Details</a> report or print/view a <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-print-a-customer-statement-showing-invoices-payments-and-balances/">customer statement</a> for a complete list of your customer payments.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Unpaid amounts</h3><p>Above the transactions, you can view your customer&#8217;s financial status based on the selected date in the table below.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1778" height="304" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-4.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54449" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-4.png 1778w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-4-1280x219.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-4-980x168.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/3-4-480x82.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1778px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Payment history table</h3><p>The transaction table displays payments and outstanding invoices from your customer, limited to the most recent 100.&nbsp;</p><p>By default, it will show orders from the date of the last printed/emailed customer statement. If a customer statement hasn&#8217;t been made, inFlow will default to showing the past year from the date of viewing.&nbsp;</p><p>Select the date filter icon to change the date range of the table.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1810" height="424" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54450" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-2.png 1810w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-2-1280x300.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-2-980x230.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/4-2-480x112.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1810px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Select the date filter icon to change which orders are displayed on the table. You can filter by:&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Since last statement</li><li>This month</li><li>Last month</li><li>This year</li><li>Custom (date range)</li></ul><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customer-list-view">Customer list view</h2><p>If you&#8217;d like to see a full list of your customers:&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click on the <em>Customer list</em> from the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/homepage" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow Homepage</a> to view all the customers in inFlow. (Or you can click on Main Menu&gt;Customer list when navigating from other inFlow screens.)</li><li>To narrow down the customer list, select <em>All filters </em>and add a checkmark next to a filter you want to search by.</li><li>The chosen filter will be added to the customer list menu, where you can enter what you&#8217;d like to search for.&nbsp;</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1400" height="1076" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/4.gif" alt="" class="wp-image-45491"/></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-windows">Windows</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-new-customers-0">Creating new customers</h2><p>To start with, head over to&nbsp;<em>Main Menu &gt; Sales &gt; New Customer</em> to input your customer details.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-name-and-contact">Name and contact</h2><p>The only required field to create a customer record is the <em>Name</em> field under the <em>Basic</em> section. The data in this field must be <strong>unique</strong>.</p><p>If you&#8217;re trying to create a new customer and get the error &#8220;This customer name is already in use&#8221;, then you have likely deactivated this customer record. inFlow doesn&#8217;t allow you to have two customers with the same name. To fix this, you can find and&nbsp;<a href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-find-hiddendeactivated-products/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">reactivate that customer record, as shown here.</a></p><p>Generally, you&#8217;ll want to put the company name in the <em>Basic</em> name field and a contact person in the <em>Contact</em> name field, as seen in the screenshot below.</p><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2015/03/65149100_1.png" alt="65149100_1" class="wp-image-15471"/></figure><p>If you need to bill multiple different departments of the same company (or multiple locations) to track separate account balances, it&#8217;s best to add an abbreviation of the department or location to the company name (e.g. &#8220;Wall-Mart &#8211; 123 Street&#8221;, &#8220;Wall-Mart &#8211; Main Street&#8221;).</p><p>The remaining fields, <em>Balance</em>&nbsp;and <em>Credit</em>, <strong>cannot be adjusted</strong> and are a result of calculations of the company&#8217;s order history and any issued credits.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-address">Address</h3><p>You can enter a business address, billing, and shipping address here or extra/alternate addresses. First, click the dropdown to select the type of address you want to fill in (billing/shipping, for example), and then click the bigger box below it. Fill in the information and then save.</p><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2015/03/65149100_2.png" alt="65149100_2" class="wp-image-15461"/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-purchasing-info-0">Purchasing Info</h3><p>This section covers any default settings you want to automatically use in a sales order for a specific customer. This is useful so you don&#8217;t have to manually change pricing / taxing info per customer, especially if they always use a specific one.</p><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2015/03/65149100_3.png" alt="65149100_3" class="wp-image-15451"/></figure><p>In the example above, this wholesale customer uses a <a href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-give-special-pricing-for-wholesale-vip-etc/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">wholesale price</a>, so by setting it here, we don&#8217;t accidentally charge our normal retail prices. They also always get a 15% discount on each item on their order (in addition to the wholesale price!), and the net 60 payment terms mean their payment is due within 60 days of being invoiced.</p><p>You can also choose to specify&nbsp;<a href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/setting-up-your-taxes/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">taxing schemes</a>&nbsp;(if they&#8217;re in a different state using different tax rates, for example) so you don&#8217;t accidentally charge the wrong tax.</p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="h-mobile">Mobile</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-new-customers-1">Creating new customers</h2><p>When you open the inFlow mobile app, you will see a list of your products on the screen. To go to the customer section to manage and create new customers, see the steps below. </p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Tap on the Main Menu button (The 3 horizontal lines) at the top left-hand corner of the screen. </li><li>Next, tap on <em>Customers</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>Once on the customer screen, tap the &#8220;<em>+</em>&#8221; symbol at the top right of the screen.&nbsp;</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter size-large is-resized"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/02/22233_2-546x1024.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32018" style="width:368px;height:690px"/></figure><p>From here, the only field that is required for you to fill out to save a customer is the customer name field that you need to fill out is the Customer name. For the remaining fields, feel free to fill them out as you need to.</p><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter size-large is-resized"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/02/22233_1-473x1024.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32019" style="width:370px;height:801px"/></figure><p>And that&#8217;s it! Now you have a new customer saved to inFlow.</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow">How to create customers in inFlow</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-customer-in-inflow/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>How come I can&#8217;t find my sales orders?</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders#respond</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 29 Mar 2023 13:09:27 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=44426</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Some of your orders may not be showing on the sales order list, but don’t worry; they’re still in inFlow, just organized differently. See below for details. Missing orders from the sales order open list On the default sales order list, you must have a location filter set in order to see stock availability while [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders">How come I can&#8217;t find my sales orders?</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Some of your orders may not be showing on the sales order list, but don’t worry; they’re still in inFlow, just organized differently. See below for details.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-missing-orders-from-the-sales-order-open-list">Missing orders from the sales order open list </h2><p>On the default sales order list, you must have a location filter set in order to see stock availability while viewing the Open list of sales orders.</p><p>If your order isn&#8217;t showing up in the open list, check that you&#8217;re filtering for the correct location.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>Warning:</strong> For best results, we suggest a minimum screen resolution of 1280 x 720.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2112" height="988" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-6.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44430" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-6.png 2112w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-6-1280x599.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-6-980x458.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-6-480x225.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2112px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-location-settings">Sales order location settings</h3><p>If your filter is correct but you don&#8217;t see the order you&#8217;re looking for, the next thing to check is whether your sales order has a location assigned. You can do this by checking the sales order details.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2092" height="1770" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44431" style="width:1046px;height:885px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2-2.png 2092w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2-2-1280x1083.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2-2-980x829.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2-2-480x406.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2092px, 100vw" /></figure><p>If you&#8217;re still having trouble finding a particular sales order, take a look at the <em>All</em> list.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2112" height="744" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3-3.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44433" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3-3.png 2112w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3-3-1280x451.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3-3-980x345.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3-3-480x169.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2112px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-what-should-i-do-if-my-sales-order-locations-are-blank">What should I do if my sales order locations are blank?</h2><p>You should always assign a location to your sales orders. Once an order has a location, inFlow can help you keep track of which locations have enough stock availability to fulfill the order and when you need to reorder stock for your location.&nbsp;</p><p>You can set a default location within a customer record so that every time you create a sales order for that customer, their default is used as the sales order location. You can find a guide on setting up customer locations in the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-handle-inventory-in-multiple-locations/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Customer default location section of this article</a>.<br><br>You can set Showroom to show and take stock from a single inFlow location. This way, when orders from Showroom are created, the correct location will already be assigned in inFlow.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-blank-sales-order-locations-from-showroom-orders">Blank sales order locations from Showroom orders </h3><p>To change the Showroom location settings:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Go to <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>Click on <em>Edit settings.</em></li><li>Under <em>Show &amp; take</em> select <em>Connect to one location</em>.&nbsp;</li></ol><p>If you want to keep using the global quantity, the location will remain blank on your sales orders, and you can find those orders in your <em>All</em> list.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-large"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="853" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4-2-1024x853.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44437" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4-2-980x817.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4-2-480x400.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1024px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-blank-sales-order-locations-from-ecommerce-orders">Blank sales order locations from ecommerce orders</h3><p>You can set your ecommerce integrations to show and take stock from a single inFlow location. This way, when ecommerce orders are pulled in, the correct location will already be assigned in inFlow.<br><br>If you want to keep using the global quantity, the location will remain blank on your sales orders, and you can find those orders in your <em>All</em> list.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1004" height="970" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44435" style="width:502px;height:485px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5-1.png 1004w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5-1-980x947.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5-1-480x464.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1004px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Example of WooCommerce integration location settings.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-canceled-inactive-orders">Canceled/inactive orders</h2><p>To take a look at the unprocessed orders, just check out the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-find-cancelled-orders/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">canceled orders in the sales order list</a>.</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders">How come I can&#8217;t find my sales orders?</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>0</slash:comments></item><item><title>How to create sales orders in inFlow</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order#comments</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[Kerisha Fiorillo]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 29 Mar 2023 13:07:51 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Managing your sales and inventory can be a daunting task, but with inFlow, it doesn&#8217;t have to be. Our powerful software is designed to help your business efficiently track sales orders, manage inventory levels, and fulfill customer orders with ease. Web Creating a sales order Order details At the top of the sales order, you [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order">How to create sales orders in inFlow</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Managing your sales and inventory can be a daunting task, but with inFlow, it doesn&#8217;t have to be. Our powerful software is designed to help your business efficiently track sales orders, manage inventory levels, and fulfill customer orders with ease.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab">Web</h2><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FVMBrpVbM62U%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-a-sales-order">Creating a sales order</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the Main Menu, click the Create button (plus icon), then select <em>Sales order</em>.</li><li>Select a customer, or select <em>Start with new customer</em> to add a new customer to inFlow.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="836" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1.gif" alt="Creating a new sales order in inFlow. " class="wp-image-64289"/><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Creating a new sales order in inFlow. </figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-order-details">Order details</h2><p>At the top of the sales order, you will find all the important details regarding the order. Check out the info below to learn more!</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1100" height="70" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3_action-menu.png" alt="Sales order Action menu. " class="wp-image-64294" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3_action-menu.png 1100w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3_action-menu-980x62.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/3_action-menu-480x31.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1100px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Sales order Action menu. </figcaption></figure><p>Towards the left of the order details, you’ll find the:&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Billing address</li><li>Fulfillment status</li><li>Order number</li><li>Order date</li><li>Assigned to&nbsp;</li><li>P.O #</li><li>Sales rep</li><li>Order priority (star icon)</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-a-vendor-in-inflow/">Customers name</a>&nbsp;</li><li>Customer contact&nbsp;</li></ul><p>Select the customer&#8217;s name to review their address or change the customer. To review more details about a customer, click the link next to their name to open their profile in a new tab.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1052" height="426" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4_customer-info-order-details.png" alt="Internal ordering details along with the customer’s information for the sales order." class="wp-image-64295" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4_customer-info-order-details.png 1052w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4_customer-info-order-details-980x397.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/4_customer-info-order-details-480x194.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1052px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Internal ordering details along with the customer’s information for the sales order.</figcaption></figure><p>In the middle of the order details, you can select <em>Set ship by date</em> to record when this order should be shipped. Click the <em>Ship order</em> toggle to view your customer’s shipping address, or you can select the <em>Same as billing address </em>toggle.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="420" height="456" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info.png" alt="Shipping information for the sales order." class="wp-image-64305" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info.png 420w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info-276x300.png 276w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info-22x24.png 22w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info-33x36.png 33w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5_Shipping-info-44x48.png 44w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 420px) 100vw, 420px" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Shipping information for the sales order.</figcaption></figure><p>If your team needs to track information that inFlow doesn’t have fields for, select <em>Add custom fields</em> to add them to inFlow. You can learn more about <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-up-custom-fields/">creating custom fields from this guide</a>.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="336" height="86" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields.png" alt="The setting for creating custom fields in sales orders." class="wp-image-64306" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields.png 336w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields-300x77.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields-24x6.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields-36x9.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/6_custom-fields-48x12.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 336px) 100vw, 336px" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The setting for creating custom fields in sales orders.</figcaption></figure><p>The right side of the order displays all payment information, including&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Payment status</li><li>Payment history</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/setting-up-your-taxes/">Taxing scheme</a></li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-give-special-pricing-for-wholesale-vip-etc/">Pricing scheme</a></li><li>Invoice date</li><li><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/set-payment-terms-net-30-net-60-etc/">Payment terms</a></li><li>Due date</li></ul><p>To view all payments made for an order, select <em>Payment history</em>.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="454" height="428" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info.png" alt="The sales order payment information." class="wp-image-64310" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info.png 454w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info-300x283.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info-24x24.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info-36x34.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/7_payment-info-48x45.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 454px) 100vw, 454px" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order payment information.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Product table</h2><p>The product table has two primary tabs:&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Order: This is where you add products to the sales order.</li><li>Pick: This tab enables you to track which products have been picked for the sales order.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1716" height="876" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/8_product-table.png" alt="The sales order product table, which highlights the &quot;Order&quot; and &quot;Pick&quot; tabs." class="wp-image-64313" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/8_product-table.png 1716w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/8_product-table-1280x653.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/8_product-table-980x500.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/8_product-table-480x245.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1716px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order product table, which highlights the <em>Order</em> and <em>Pick</em> tabs.</figcaption></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Product table completion statuses</h3><p>Right below the tab headings are the product table statuses. The <em>Order</em> tab shows the number of product line items on the product table.&nbsp;</p><p>Below the <em>Pick</em> tab, the percentage displays how much of the order has been picked.&nbsp;</p><p>The <em>Restock</em> tab displays the percentage of products returned to your inventory after a customer return is processed.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>The <em>Restock </em>tab is only available when processing returns.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1720" height="942" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/9_order-tabs-with-restock.png" alt="The sales order product table, including the Restock tab, is only available when processing returns." class="wp-image-64348" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/9_order-tabs-with-restock.png 1720w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/9_order-tabs-with-restock-1280x701.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/9_order-tabs-with-restock-980x537.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/9_order-tabs-with-restock-480x263.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1720px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order product table, including the Restock tab, is only available when processing returns.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Adding products to sales orders</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>In the product table, click on <em>Add products</em> or <em>Scan to add</em> to select products.&nbsp;</li><li>The product picker will stay open, allowing you to select multiple products. To increase the quantity of a single product, click/scan the same product repeatedly.&nbsp;</li><li>Edit the <em>Quantity</em> and <em>Unit price</em>. Optionally, add a discount to individual line items.</li><li>You can change the sorting order in the product table by selecting the grab handles to rearrange products or by choosing the table headings.</li><li>Next to the <em>Save </em>button, you can print, email, or add an attachment to the order.</li><li>Click <em>Save</em> when done.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="840" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/10-product-table.gif" alt="Adding products to a sales order, and customizing the view. " class="wp-image-64356"/><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Adding products to a sales order and customizing the view.</figcaption></figure><p class="is-style-tip-quote">To add the same product to another line on the sales order, select the blue <em>Add another line</em> button next to the product.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1028" height="690" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/11_line-item.png" alt="The sales order product picker displays an Add another line button, allowing the same product to be listed on two different lines on the sales order." class="wp-image-64359" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/11_line-item.png 1028w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/11_line-item-980x658.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/11_line-item-480x322.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1028px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order product picker displays an <em>Add another line</em> button, allowing the same product to be listed on two different lines on the sales order.</figcaption></figure><div style="height:66px" aria-hidden="true" class="wp-block-spacer"></div><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Did you know you can buy barcodes with inFlow? We&#8217;ve partnered with GS1 as an official partner, which allows you to create UPC barcodes that will be recognized by retailers such as Amazon and Walmart. For more details, check out the <a href="https://gtin.inflowinventory.com/">GS1 Barcode Shop</a>.</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading">Removing products from an order</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Hover over the row containing the product you want to remove.</li><li>Click the X button beside the row to remove it.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1740" height="544" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/12_remove.png" alt="The product table displayed with the cursor hovering over the remove button. " class="wp-image-64364" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/12_remove.png 1740w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/12_remove-1280x400.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/12_remove-980x306.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/12_remove-480x150.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1740px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The product table displayed with the cursor hovering over the remove button.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Invoicing a sales order</h2><p>When invoices are emailed or printed, inFlow updates the payment status to Invoiced. If there is no need to print or email the invoice, you can manually mark it as invoiced by clicking the ellipsis button next to <em>&#8216;Mark Paid&#8217;</em> and selecting&#8217; <em>Mark Invoiced&#8217;</em>.</p><p>Only sales orders marked as invoiced, paid, or partially paid are sent to QuickBooks Online or Xero.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Completing sales orders</h2><p>A sales order is complete once all products have been picked and the order has been paid in full.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Picking products</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Select the <em>Pick</em> tab.&nbsp;</li><li>Select the checkbox next to each product to pick them, or select <em>Scan to pick </em>if you’re using a barcode scanner.&nbsp;</li><li>Save the order when done.</li></ol><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>You can fulfill the entire order by selecting <em>Fulfill </em>or<em> Pick all.</em></p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1732" height="608" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/13_picking.png" alt="The Pick tab and the various options for picking products. " class="wp-image-64368" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/13_picking.png 1732w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/13_picking-1280x449.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/13_picking-980x344.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/13_picking-480x168.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1732px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The <em>Pick</em> tab and the various options for picking products.</figcaption></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-partially-picking-sales-orders">Partially picking sales orders</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Select the <em>Pick </em>tab.</li><li>Click on the <em>Quantity</em> field, enter the amount that was picked, then click <em>Partial Pick.&nbsp;</em></li><li>Optionally select the Pick date column to enter the date the product was partially picked.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="840" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/14_partial-picking.gif" alt="The process for partially picking a product on the sales order. " class="wp-image-64373"/><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The process for partially picking a product on the sales order. </figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-backorder-splitting-orders-by-quantity-on-hand">Backorder/splitting orders by quantity on hand</h2><p>If products on the sales order are backordered, you can split the sales order so that you can fulfill the products that are on hand, and then fulfill the remaining products when they become available.&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open a sales order and click the <em>More</em> button in the Action menu.</li><li>Click <em>Split order</em>.</li><li>You’ll see a <em>Split order by inventory on hand</em> message asking you to confirm the changes. Select <em>Split order</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>A confirmation message will display the newly created sales order. To view it, click <em>Open in a new tab</em> or select <em>Close</em>.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1902" height="1620" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/15_split-order.png" alt="Splitting a sales order based on available inventory." class="wp-image-64380" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/15_split-order.png 1902w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/15_split-order-1280x1090.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/15_split-order-980x835.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/15_split-order-480x409.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1902px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Splitting a sales order based on available inventory. </figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-paying-sales-orders">Paying sales orders</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>For sales orders that will be shipped, enter the shipping fee in the <em>Freight</em> field.</li><li>To pay for your order in full, click <em>Mark paid</em> or enter the amount in the <em>Paid</em> field.</li><li>To add details, such as a reference number or payment method, click the <em>Paid</em> button or select <em>Payment history </em>from the top-right corner.</li><li>Save the order when done.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1968" height="1650" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/16_payment-history.png" alt="The sales order Payment history, where you can track payment details or process multiple payments." class="wp-image-64390" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/16_payment-history.png 1968w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/16_payment-history-1280x1073.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/16_payment-history-980x822.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/16_payment-history-480x402.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1968px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order <em>Payment history</em>, where you can track payment details or process multiple payments.</figcaption></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-tracking-multiple-payments">Tracking multiple payments</h3><p>If your sales order is paid with multiple payments, you can use the Payment history screen to enter the details.</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>On the order, click <em>Paid</em> to open the <em>Payment history </em>screen.</li><li>Select <em>Payment</em>, then enter the amount.</li><li>Click <em>Update</em>, then save the sales order</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="918" height="1084" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/17_payment-history.png" alt="Example of a sales order with the Payment history showing multiple payments." class="wp-image-64397" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/17_payment-history.png 918w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/17_payment-history-480x567.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 918px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Example of a sales order with the <em>Payment history</em> showing multiple payments.</figcaption></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-tracking-sales-expenses-fees-etc">Tracking sales expenses, fees, etc.</h3><p>To track payments that don&#8217;t go to your customer, such as sales fees, use the <em><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-handle-tariffs-charged-on-my-incoming-shipments/">Non-customers costs field</a></em> to track those expenses.</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click on <em>Cost details </em>at the bottom right of the sales order.</li><li>Select either the percentage or the dollar amount, then enter the expense amount in the field.</li><li>Click <em>Update</em> when done, then save the sales order.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1880" height="1534" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/18-non-customer-costs.png" alt="The Cost details screen is used to track costs that have been incurred but not passed on to customers." class="wp-image-64401" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/18-non-customer-costs.png 1880w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/18-non-customer-costs-1280x1044.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/18-non-customer-costs-980x800.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/18-non-customer-costs-480x392.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1880px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The <em>Cost details</em> screen is used to track costs that have been incurred but not passed on to customers.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-serialized-products">Serialized products</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the Order tab, add the serialized product to the order, and enter the quantity.</li><li>Click on the Pick tab, select the product to open the serial number selection.</li><li>Select the serials or click on Auto pick serials, then click Save.</li><li>Save the sales order when done.</li></ol><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>After all serial numbers have been added to the order, the icon next to the <em>Quantity</em> field will turn solid blue.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="860" height="720" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/19_serials.gif" alt="This image shows how to choose serial numbers for serialized products on sales orders." class="wp-image-64405"/><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">This image shows how to choose serial numbers for serialized products on sales orders.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-service-products">Service products</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the sales tab, add the service product to the order.</li><li>Click the Pick tab, and select Complete services.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1732" height="680" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/20_services.png" alt="The sales order pick tab, with a focus on the Complete services button." class="wp-image-64411" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/20_services.png 1732w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/20_services-1280x503.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/20_services-980x385.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/20_services-480x188.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1732px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">The sales order pick tab, with a focus on the <em>Complete services</em> button.</figcaption></figure><ol start="3"><li>Select the services that have been completed, or select <em>Complete all</em>.</li> <li>Click <em>Done</em> to return to the order.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="912" height="420" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/21_complete-services.png" alt="Where to select the completed services from the sales order Pick tab." class="wp-image-64416" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/21_complete-services.png 912w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/21_complete-services-480x221.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 912px, 100vw" /><figcaption class="wp-element-caption">Where to select the completed services from the sales order <em>Pick</em> tab.</figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-returning-products-on-sales-orders">Returning products on sales orders</h2><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-option-1-returning-products-on-an-existing-order">Option 1 &#8211; Returning products on an existing order</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>From the product table, hover over the product and select the blue arrow to return to the product.</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1740" height="452" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/22_return.png" alt="" class="wp-image-64419" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/22_return.png 1740w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/22_return-1280x333.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/22_return-980x255.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/22_return-480x125.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1740px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="2"><li>The returned product will be added below with the same unit price and quantity that is on the order. Edit the quantity you’re returning.</li> <li>Click the Restock tab, then click the Restock button to add the returned products to your inventory. On this tab, you can also select the Discard button if the product(s) are no longer usable.</li><li>If payment is outstanding, select Refund or the ellipsis next to Refund to offer credits to your customer.</li><li>Save the order when done.</li></ol> <p></p><p></p><p></p><p></p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-sales-order-list-view">Sales order list view</h2><p>You can view all your open and in-progress sales orders from the sales order list.&nbsp;</p><p>At the top of the screen, you&#8217;ll see pre-made lists to help you view <em>Open, Unpaid,</em> or <em>All </em>orders<em>. </em>You&#8217;ll view <em>Open </em>by default.&nbsp;</p><p>Below the main order statuses, you&#8217;ll find additional filters to help you find the orders you&#8217;re looking for. To change which filters are on the screen, click <em>All filters</em>.</p><p>Hover over the headings: the ones with two arrows next to them mean you can sort the sales orders by that heading. You can sort by <em>Order number and status, customer name, </em>and more.&nbsp;</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-warning-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>For best results, we suggest a minimum screen resolution of 1280 x 720.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="2112" height="1748" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-4.png" alt="" class="wp-image-44416" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-4.png 2112w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-4-1280x1059.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-4-980x811.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/1-4-480x397.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 2112px, 100vw" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-customizing-sales-order-lists">Customizing sales order lists</h3><p>Take a look at the 6:05 minute mark to learn how to customize the sales order list view.</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2F6ErdrmyivcU%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Sales order prioritization</h2><p>You can click on the star icon to mark sales orders as prioritized.</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Prioritized orders will appear at the top of the Sales Order <em>Open</em> list view.</li><li>You can click on the grab handles to drag and rearrange the sales orders to set the prioritization order (when the sales order list is sorted by <em>Priority).</em></li></ul><p>The sales order at the top of the list will be given priority for processing. You can learn more about the importance of the order placement, <a href="#Stock-availability">Stock availability &amp; sales order prioritization section of this article</a>.</p><p>If you&#8217;ve changed the sorting of the sales order list by clicking on another column heading, the priority orders may not stay at the top of the sales list. However, you can still identify prioritized orders because they&#8217;ll have an orange bar and star next to them.</p><p>To restore the original sorting with priority at the top, click the <em>Priority</em> column heading.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1332" height="1080" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/1.gif" alt="The sales order list shows orders marked as priority and rearranged by clicking and dragging the grab handles. " class="wp-image-54880"/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>You can set team member access rights for sales order prioritization to <em>View only</em> or <em>Full access</em>. Take a look at this <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/teammember-access-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">guide for how to restrict team member access rights</a>.&nbsp;</p></blockquote><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-noticing-priority-list-changes">Noticing priority list changes</h3><p>Unlike other order list screens in inFlow, <span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">changes to priority orders on the&nbsp;<em>Open&nbsp;</em>list are visible</span> in real-time. If you notice any changes to the priority list while viewing the sales order list, keep this in mind.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="Stock-availability">Stock availability &amp; sales order prioritization</h2><p>While viewing the <em>Open</em> list, you&#8217;ll notice that there are stock availability statuses listed for all the orders. These are listed based on the amount of inventory you have to fulfill the sales order.&nbsp;</p><p>inFlow will reserve stock on the prioritized orders first. Within the priority list, inFlow will reserve stock from the sales order at the top of the list.&nbsp;</p><p>Rearranging the priority list will cause inFlow to recalculate stock levels based on the position of each sales order on the list.&nbsp;</p><p>All other orders without a priority will be sorted by the <em>Open</em> list by default:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Requested ship date</li><li>Order date (oldest to newest)</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Stock availability statuses</h2><p>See the table below for a breakdown of the sales order list statutes. </p><figure class="wp-block-table"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Available</strong></td><td>This status indicates that you don&#8217;t have enough products in stock to fulfill your order. You should create a purchase order, transfer stock from another location, or create additional stock with a work order, if applicable.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Waiting on stock</strong></td><td>This status is also known as <em>Quantity on order. </em>It means there isn&#8217;t enough stock to fulfill the sales order. This status shows when you&#8217;ve ordered more from your vendor, are waiting on a stock transfer, or are waiting on more to be made from a manufacture order.&nbsp;</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Not enough stock</strong></td><td>This status indicates that you don&#8217;t have enough products in stock to fulfill your order. You should create a purchase order, transfer stock from another location, or create additional stock with a manufacture order, if applicable.&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading"><br>inFlow quantities&nbsp;</h3><p>inFlow breaks down quantities in a few ways to help you organize your inventory. You may wonder what the difference is between quantity on hand and quantity available. For more information, refer to this guide on&nbsp;how inFlow calculates various<a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/whats-the-difference-between-quantity-on-handquantity-available-etc/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener"> quantities</a>.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Can the sales order list view be saved?</h2><p>Currently, only the priority sales orders view is saved when viewing the sales order list.&nbsp; This means any sorting and filtering of the list will need to be set every time you&#8217;re on the sales order list.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">I can&#8217;t find some of my sales orders!</h2><p>If you&#8217;ve noticed that some of your sales orders that were showing on the inFlow Inventory for Web app aren&#8217;t listed anymore, don&#8217;t worry. Your orders are still in inFlow!&nbsp;</p><p>They&#8217;re probably not displaying on the default <em>Open</em> list view because the <em>Open</em> list shows only orders&nbsp;that have been assigned locations. If you have sales orders without locations, they will be shown in the <em>All</em> view.&nbsp;</p><p>To learn more about how to add a location to your sales order and how the views work, <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-come-i-cant-find-my-sales-orders/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">take a look at this guide</a>.&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">What are the default sales order list settings?</h2><p>You might be wondering about the logic of how the order list is sorted. Take a look at the table below.&nbsp;</p><figure class="wp-block-table"><table><tbody><tr><td><strong>Open</strong></td><td>In this view, you&#8217;ll see all sales orders where fulfillment isn&#8217;t complete.<br><br>As mentioned, orders that have been starred will be at the top of the screen.&nbsp;<br><br>After the priority sales orders (or if there are no priority orders), the sales order will be shown from oldest to newest first. This will help you focus on fulfilling orders for the customers who&#8217;ve been waiting the longest for their orders.&nbsp;<br><br>Orders will be sorted by requested ship date, and if that isn&#8217;t filled out, then by order date.&nbsp;<br></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Unpaid</strong></td><td>In this view, you&#8217;ll see all sales orders that have the payment status as not paid.<br><br>Similar to <em>Open</em>, the <em>Unpaid</em> list will sort the oldest unpaid orders first, based on the order date.<br><br>This will also help you keep track of older unpaid orders.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>All</strong></td><td>In this view, you&#8217;ll see all sales orders. This includes sales quotes, unconfirmed, and canceled sales orders.<br><br>This will show all orders. You&#8217;ll see the newest sales orders at the top of the list and the oldest at the bottom.</td></tr></tbody></table></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="inFlow-pay">Receiving payments from emailed orders</h2><p>If your business is located/registered in the United States or Canada, you can sign up for inFlow Pay to accept credit card payments from orders you email from inFlow! For complete details on this,&nbsp;<a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-accept-payments-in-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">take a look at our inFlow Pay article here.</a></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab">Windows</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-creating-a-sales-order-0">Creating a sales order</h2><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click <em>Main Menu &gt;</em> <em>Sales</em> &gt; <em>New Sales Order</em>.</li><li>Begin by adding your customer information at the top of the order:<ul class="wp-block-list"><li>If your customer is already in the system, you&#8217;ll see them highlighted as you type their name into the <em>Customer</em> field</li><li>If your customer is not in your system yet, continue typing out the full customer name and click <em>Add New</em> to create a new record for them. As you fill out their contact information, inFlow will automatically save it to their product record.</li></ul></li><li>The location will <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/everything-you-need-to-know-about-improved-reordering/#location-setting" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">automatically be set</a>. Change the location as needed. If there are multiple locations the items are being sold from, you can simply delete them and leave the field blank. (it&#8217;ll pick the item based on the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-track-lot-numbersbatch-numbersexpiration-dates/#Alpha-Picking" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">picking options</a> that you set)</li><li>Add items to your order by clicking into the <em>Item</em> column and entering your product name.</li></ol><p></p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Did you know you can buy barcodes with inFlow? We&#8217;ve teamed up with GS1 to be an official partner. This means can create UPC barcodes that will be recognized by retailers such as Amazon and Walmart. For more details, check out the <a href="https://gtin.inflowinventory.com/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">GS1 Barcode Shop</a>.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-large"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/05/22119_1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32820"/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-style-tip-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>When adding items to your order, you can filter your product selection by clicking <em>Show Search </em>in the product table. This allows you to quickly search for your products by vendor, category, price, and other fields &#8212; right from the order!</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-completing-a-sales-order">Completing a sales order</h2><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Click <em>Fulfill </em>when your customer has received the items on the order. This will move the items <em>out</em> of your inventory.</li><li>If your customer has not yet paid you, you can click the arrow button beside <em>Mark Paid</em> and select <em>Mark invoiced</em>. This will move the order to an <em>Invoiced</em> status. Printing an <em>Invoice</em> document will automatically mark the order as <em>Invoiced</em>.</li><li>If your customer has paid for part of the order, you can put that amount into the &#8220;Paid&#8221; field to keep track. If they&#8217;ve paid the full amount, click <em>Mark Paid</em> to complete the payment. You can also click the &#8220;Paid&#8221; field to record more detailed information like a reference or cheque number.</li></ul><h2 class="wp-block-heading">To view your order profit</h2><p>You can easily view the total estimated profit of a Sales Order by clicking the drop-down on the <em>Sub-Total</em> heading in your Sales Order. This will quickly show you the <em>Sub-Total</em>, <em>Estimated Cost</em> <em>of Goods Sold,</em> and <em>Estimated Profit</em> in this Sales Order.</p><p>The profit is calculated by taking the cost of each item as well as any non-customer costs and subtracting them from the sub-total to get your profit.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>NOTE:&nbsp;</strong><span style="font-weight: 400">Since this is only an estimate, inFlow uses the applicable costing layer to calculate your profit on the order (this is especially applicable to those using FIFO or LIFO costing). Once the order is complete, inFlow will calculate the actual profit using the true costs on the order.</span></p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image aligncenter size-large"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/05/22119_2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32818"/></figure><p></p><p>You can learn more about how to <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-pick-ship-the-items-on-my-sales-order/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">pick, pack, and ship your sales orders from this guide</a>.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">What else can I do on the sales order screen?</h2><p>There are other advanced things you can do from the sales order screen as well. You can:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li><a aria-label=" (opens in a new tab)" href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-taxes-for-my-orders/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Adding taxes to your orders</a></li><li><a aria-label=" (opens in a new tab)" href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-print-packing-slip-include-shipping-information-on-my-sales-order/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Adding shipping / requested ship date / due date </a></li><li><a aria-label=" (opens in a new tab)" href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-set-the-payment-method-or-multiple-payments-in-a-sales-order/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Entering specific payment details (payment method, check number, etc.)</a></li><li><a aria-label=" (opens in a new tab)" href="https://inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/can-i-provide-a-list-of-back-ordered-items-on-an-order/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Partially shipping items out due to back order</a></li></ul><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="inFlow-pay">Receiving payments from emailed orders</h2><p>If your business is located/registered in the United States or Canada, you can sign up for inFlow Pay to accept credit card payments from orders you email from inFlow! For complete details on this,&nbsp;<a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-accept-payments-in-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">take a look at our inFlow Pay article here.</a></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab">Mobile</h2><p>If you&#8217;d like to create sales orders on the go, you can use the inFlow mobile app!&nbsp;</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="how_to_so">How to create and complete a sales order</h2><p id="block-6ebaf1df-e613-4f09-bb31-56104d69600a">The following are the basics &#8211; we&#8217;ve packed a lot of functionality into mobile sales orders, so be sure to check out the other sections in this guide to learn more about specific actions and screens.&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Open the inFlow Inventory app on your mobile phone, tap on the Main Menu button (the 3 horizontal lines at the top left of the screen), and select <em>Sales Orders</em> (or directly tap on <em>Sales orders</em> on the homepage).</li><li>On the sales order list, tap the &#8216;+&#8217; symbol on the top right of the screen to create a new sales order.</li><li>Select a new or existing customer to add to your order.<ul class="wp-block-list"><li>If you create a new customer, the only required field is&nbsp;<em>Customer Name</em>&nbsp;&#8211; you can edit their information later by tapping the Main Menu button &gt;&nbsp;<em>Customers</em>.</li></ul></li><li>Tap <em>Add product</em> to add products to your sales order (or scan your product barcode instead by tapping <em>Scan product</em>). You can tap on the product you want to add to the order, then tap&nbsp;<em>Add</em>&nbsp;at the bottom of the screen.<ul class="wp-block-list"><li>You can search your item list by tapping the search bar at the top.</li><li>Once you&#8217;ve chosen all the items you want to add, tap <em>Done</em> to return to your sales order.</li></ul></li><li>Tap or swipe left to the <em>Details</em> tab to edit the order details, including customer information and shipping, edit inventory details (where inFlow should remove inventory from), add payment terms, remarks, etc.&nbsp;</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized is-style-default"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/03/2021-03-19_10-17-44.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32258"/></figure><p></p><ol start="6"><li>When you&#8217;re ready to pick the order, tap the yellow <em>Fulfillment</em> button (or <em>Pick order</em> if you have shipping turned on).&nbsp;Here you can select which items to pick to fulfill your order. The sales order will become fulfilled once all products are selected.</li><li>Add any payments to the order by tapping or swiping right to the <em>Order</em> tab and tapping into the <em>Paid</em> field.&nbsp;</li><li>Finally, tap <em>Save</em> on the top right to save your order.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-style-default"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/05/22119_7-510x1024.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32887"/></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="barcodes_so">Adding products by scanning their barcodes</h2><p id="block-4b7ab53d-fe95-4fe1-84c9-a9af04bfcb09">If your products have barcodes, you can quickly add them to your order using your phone&#8217;s camera!</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>On the <em>Order </em>tab, tap on <em>Scan products.</em></li><li>Position the barcode within the frame. When the camera detects a barcode, the <em>Scan item </em>button will turn orange.</li><li>Tap the <em>Scan products </em>button or the camera view to scan the barcode:<ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Scanning the same barcode more than once will increase that product&#8217;s quantity by 1 for each additional scan.&nbsp;</li><li>You can scan different items all at once from the barcode scanning screen!</li></ul></li><li>When you&#8217;re done scanning your items, tap <em>Done</em> to add these items to the order.&nbsp;</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="editing_so">Editing products</h2><p>Tapping on an item on the sales order will take you to the&nbsp;<em>Product details</em>&nbsp;screen, where you&#8217;ll be able to edit the following:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Quantity: you can tap into the field directly and type in a value or use the &#8216;+&#8217; and &#8216;–&#8217; buttons instead.</li><li>Unit of measure (UoM)</li><li>Unit price</li><li>Item discount</li><li>Taxing scheme&nbsp;</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-style-default"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/05/22119_8-514x1024.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32888"/></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>To save your changes, make sure to tap the yellow&nbsp;<em>Done&nbsp;</em>button. Going back using the &#8216;&lt;&#8216; button on the top left will close the window and discard your changes instead!</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="removing_so">Removing products</h2><p id="block-b70fe8e1-37cd-4587-989a-a2241a25746a">Did you add a product to an order that you&#8217;d like to remove? Here&#8217;s how to do it:</p><p>Note: If you&#8217;d like to <em>return</em> an item that was previously purchased, <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-return-items-to-my-vendor/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">see here for steps</a>!</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Tap on the&nbsp;<em>Edit</em>&nbsp;button above the item list on the&nbsp;<em>Order</em>&nbsp;tab.&nbsp;</li><li>Tap the <em>X</em> symbol on the top left corner of the product/s you&#8217;d like to remove.&nbsp;</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="fulfillin_picking_so">Fulfilling/Picking products</h2><p id="block-9aff87e4-01c9-42cb-bfda-0b21f9ac1f29">Once you&#8217;ve added your products to the order, you can start fulfilling/picking it!</p><p id="block-9aff87e4-01c9-42cb-bfda-0b21f9ac1f29">Click the yellow <em>Fulfillment&nbsp;</em>button on the bottom right when shipping is turned off.</p><p id="block-9aff87e4-01c9-42cb-bfda-0b21f9ac1f29">Click the yellow <em>Pick Order </em>button on the bottom right when shipping is turned on.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c5df9e06-ad66-46ad-a00f-606c50812c4c">How to fulfill/pick items on your order</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>To auto-fulfill/pick all items on the order, tap on the picking progress button on the bottom right and select <em>Autofill</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>To mark an entire item line as fulfilled/picked, tap on the empty checkbox on the left side.</li><li>You can also fulfill/pick your items by scanning them! Tap on the barcode icon on the top right to open the camera barcode scanner.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube wp-embed-aspect-16-9 wp-has-aspect-ratio"><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2Fv11WlkcGxe4%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a56e73d0-3395-499a-8fef-284e4b9aa870">To unfulfill/unpick an item:</h3><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>To auto-unfulfill/unpick all items on the order, tap on the picking progress button on the bottom right and select <em>Unpick all</em>.</li><li>Tap on the gray checkmark on the left side of the item line OR the ellipsis (three dots) on the right side to open the actions menu and select <em>Unfulfill/Unpick </em>or <em>Partial fulfill/pick</em> to adjust the number of fulfilled/picked items.</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-079243b2-74fb-4192-afbf-4e58dfe140df">More actions menu&nbsp;</h3><p id="block-a3808d9f-4958-4338-bce5-5388d54db8fc">Next to each item line on the Fulfill/Picking screen, tapping the ellipsis (three dots) on the right side will open the <em>More actions menu</em>. Here you&#8217;ll be able to:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Edit the location where the product will be fulfilled/picked from.</li><li>Edit the fulfilled/picked date for products that have been fulfilled/picked.</li><li>Partially fulfill/pick items.&nbsp;</li><li>Unfulfill/unpick items.</li></ul><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="shipping_so">Shipping&nbsp;</h2><p id="block-99daa876-5890-4ea4-98c6-c5fa8b219715">To include shipping an order, swipe left to get to the <em>Details </em>tab. When the shipping toggle is ON, the shipping address, required ship date, and the PO number will appear.&nbsp;</p><p id="block-6d0ee630-6632-4012-a3ac-473bf482840c">In the mobile app, all picked and unshipped items on an order will be shipped in the same box. The box number and the contents of the box cannot be edited from the mobile app. However, you can remove an item from a shipment.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a085aaaa-8ba6-4721-a265-343f5af5de38">Ship all items on an order</h3><p id="block-6304bae2-7c8f-4f9d-acca-b9aae2c4f872">When all items are picked on the order, a <em>Ship order</em> button will appear on the bottom right:&nbsp;</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Tap the <em>Ship order</em> button to open the Shipping details screen.&nbsp;</li><li>Enter your shipping details and tap <em>Complete shipment</em> to mark the items as shipped.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</li></ol><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-35e1ec83-9f6b-418c-94cd-af49c25d3220">Remove items from a shipment</h3><p id="block-88fe31bd-993a-472c-95cc-63068123288b">In the mobile app, it isn&#8217;t possible to see what items were shipped in a specific shipment. To remove an item that has been shipped on an order (without deleting the entire shipment), you can unpick the item from the order.&nbsp;</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-278bcd01-ce36-44ca-9ece-4c12cf10a6be">Edit/remove a shipment</h3><p id="block-0a5f3277-229f-459c-84b0-5ce3ff0d7362">You can edit your shipments in the <em>Shipping details </em>screen:</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Note: it&#8217;s not possible to see what items were shipped in a specific shipment in the mobile app.&nbsp;</p></blockquote><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Tap on the <em>+ Actions </em>button on the bottom right corner and select <em>Ship</em>.&nbsp;</li><li>In the Shipments screen, tap on the shipment you&#8217;d like to edit to open the Shipping details screen.</li><li>Here, you can edit the shipped date, add shipping remarks, carrier, and a reference number or delete the shipment.</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="returning_so">Returning products</h2><p id="block-87b4e61f-9b5b-484d-a73f-6c8121d376cf">Similar to the desktop app, a returned item in the mobile app will appear as a separate line item.</p><p id="block-1780d8b0-4793-437c-b9b1-30e00ead1bd0">There are a couple of ways to return items in the mobile app:</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-3fd22f11-eecd-4099-bd95-0efc1ab2a534">Returning an existing item on an order:&nbsp;</h3><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Tap on the item on the order you&#8217;d like to return.</li><li>On the <em>Product details</em> screen, tap the ellipsis on the top right and select <em>Return product</em>.</li><li>In the <em>Return product </em>screen, enter the quantity you&#8217;d like to return and tap <em>Return</em> on the top right to complete the transaction.&nbsp;</li></ol><figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-style-default"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/sites/4/2021/05/22119_9-512x1024.png" alt="" class="wp-image-32889"/></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-52a70d36-739f-4b74-9d19-ea9c1d0d1467">Returning an item that is not on an order</h3><p id="block-c5ba4a64-1a00-4d04-92a5-2e3e4008ff54">Sometimes, you may need to return an item from a customer that wasn&#8217;t on an order to begin with. You can do this on the mobile by adding the item as a returned item:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>On the <em>Order </em>screen, tap <em>Add product </em>and select it from your product list (or scan its barcode by tapping <em>Scan products</em>).</li><li>In the <em>Add product </em>screen, set the quantity to a negative amount to mark that this item will be a return (e.g., if you want to return 2 items, you&#8217;ll add a &#8220;-2&#8221; quantity).&nbsp;</li><li>Tap <em>Return</em> on the top right to complete the transaction.&nbsp;</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="pay_invoice_so">Invoicing and payments</h2><p id="block-55589920-e103-43f5-a531-9a36ab0edcb8">At the bottom of the <em>Order</em> tab, you&#8217;ll find the subtotal, tax amounts, freight, the order total, the paid amount, and the order balance.&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>To mark the order as invoiced, use the +<em> Actions</em> menu on the bottom left and select <em>Invoice.&nbsp;</em></li><li>If you&#8217;d like to mark the entire order as paid, you can use the <em>+ Actions</em> menu on the bottom left and select <em>Mark paid</em>.&nbsp;&nbsp;</li><li>To record a partial payment, tap into the <em>Paid</em> field and enter the amount paid.&nbsp;</li><li>You can also add payment via the <em>Payment History </em>screen (see below).&nbsp;</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b083d23a-5cd5-47d9-8378-249ccd4a0d1f">Payment history</h3><p id="block-deb2696d-9fd7-4959-a759-488aa7526d65">You can tap on <em>History</em> next to the <em>Paid</em> text to access the payment history for the order.&nbsp;</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Tapping <em>Add payment</em> will open a Payment details screen where you can enter a new payment.&nbsp;</li><li>Tapping on an existing payment will open the Payment details screen.</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1c8651ec-db74-4854-a62c-18d445911669">Payment details</h3><p id="block-5a29e6f0-ba16-4e3c-8fdb-a58eb912e0b9">The Payment details screen allows you to edit the details of a specific payment, such as:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>The amount applied (this will be negative when making a refund)</li><li>The refund toggle &#8211; this will mark the amount applied as a refund.&nbsp;</li><li>Payment method</li><li>Date</li><li>Reference number</li><li>Remarks (per payment)&nbsp;</li></ul><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="pricing_scheme_so">Pricing, currency, taxing scheme, and non-customer costs</h3><p id="block-8085df06-d20c-4d8d-acdf-0625ee9a4bfa">You can edit which pricing scheme, currency, and tax to apply to the order, as well as add non-customer costs from the Pricing screen. Swipe to the very bottom of the <em>Order </em>tab and tap on <em>Edit pricing</em>.&nbsp;</p><p><strong>It is not possible to create a new pricing scheme or taxing scheme from the mobile app.</strong></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="remarks_so">Remarks&nbsp;</h2><p id="block-0cb40707-0fb4-4aaf-b8a0-215bad9a734b">In the mobile app, all your sales order remarks can be added from the <em>Details </em>tab. You&#8217;ll be able to edit:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Sales remarks (in the desktop app, these would be found in the Sales tab).</li><li>Pick remarks (Windows app: these would be found in the Pick tab).</li><li>Ship remarks (iWindows app: these would be found in the Ship tab).</li><li>Return remarks (Windows app: these would be found in the Return tab).</li><li>Restock remarks (Windows app: these would be found in the Restock tab).</li></ul><p id="block-e3b8e301-225b-4c03-bbe9-4f804a68a964">To add a remark:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Swipe left or tap on the Details tab from the Sales Order details screen.&nbsp;</li><li>Scroll to the Remarks section at the bottom and tap into the remark field you&#8217;d like to edit.&nbsp;</li><li>Tap <em>Save</em> on the top right to save your changes.</li></ol><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="payments_email_so">Receiving payments from emailed orders</h2><p id="block-19e87033-be5a-4ff2-8824-bdcb2e7d6f90">If your business is located/registered in the United States or Canada, you can sign up for inFlow Pay to accept credit card payments from orders you email from inFlow! For complete details on this,&nbsp;<a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-accept-payments-in-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">take a look at our inFlow Pay article here.</a></p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>If you&#8217;d like to know more about the inFlow Inventory Companion App, <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/inflow-cloud-companion-app-full-guide" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">check the full guide here</a>!</p></blockquote><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order">How to create sales orders in inFlow</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-do-i-create-and-complete-a-sales-order/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>1</slash:comments></item><item><title>inFlow&#8217;s Online Showroom: inFlow&#8217;s B2B portal</title><link>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal</link><comments>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal#comments</comments><dc:creator><![CDATA[nurya]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 28 Jan 2022 16:02:10 +0000</pubDate><guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.inflowdebug.com/?post_type=cloud&#038;p=37955</guid><description><![CDATA[<p>Do you want to easily sell your inventory while ensuring accurate stock numbers? inFlow&#8217;s Online Showroom is the solution! Please note that this feature is available on select plans or add-ons. Overview Showroom overview The Online Showroom is a way to share your product information online with customers, allowing them to view the products you [&#8230;]</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal">inFlow&#8217;s Online Showroom: inFlow&#8217;s B2B portal</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></description><content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Do you want to easily sell your inventory while ensuring accurate stock numbers? inFlow&#8217;s Online Showroom is the solution!</p><p></p><p><em><strong>Please note that this feature is available on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/software-pricing" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">select plans or add-ons</a>.</strong></em></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="overview">Overview</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="overview">Showroom overview</h2><p>The Online Showroom is a way to share your product information online with customers, allowing them to view the products you sell, check stock availability, and place orders. You can control exactly which products and product information you want to display in the Showroom&#8217;s simple and customer-friendly catalog-style view.</p><p>We&#8217;ve set up a sample Showroom. <a href="https://showroom.inflowinventory.com/7fcba12d-f0e8-e611-80c3-000d3a60113d" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Check </a><a href="https://showroom.inflowinventory.com/1c7f2ae9-ea45-4f46-8e1c-780ebf37763e" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">i</a><a href="https://showroom.inflowinventory.com/7fcba12d-f0e8-e611-80c3-000d3a60113d" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">t out here</a>!</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2Fn2RTEBcV69M%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="what-does-the-showroom-look-like">What does the Showroom look like?</h2><p>The Showroom has a clean design with your company name and logo at the top left-hand side of the page.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1269" height="904" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/1.png" alt="A view of what a showroom page could look like for customers who will order from you." class="wp-image-37969" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/1.png 1269w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/1-980x698.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/1-480x342.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1269px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Showroom uses your inFlow Inventory company logo from the<em> Company details</em> section. To modify your company name and logo:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Log into <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/account" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">inFlow&#8217;s account settings</a>.&nbsp;</li><li>Click <em>Edit company details.</em> Here you can set your company logo, name, address, etc.</li></ol><p>If you&#8217;ve sent a private showroom invitation to your customers, there will be a shopping bag icon at the top right of the screen. The current number of items in the cart is shown there, and clicking it will open the shopping cart, where the customer can review their order and check out.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1802" height="1085" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/2-5.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37972" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/2-5.png 1802w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/2-5-1280x771.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/2-5-980x590.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/2-5-480x289.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1802px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Customers viewing your Showroom can contact you using the built-in email form at the top-right corner of the page. From the showroom set-up window, you can choose what email address your mail is directed to. The phone number and contact message are also listed at the bottom of the email form.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="499" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/3-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37975" style="width:572px;height:374px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/3-1.png 763w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/3-1-480x314.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 763px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Depending on your chosen settings, your customers can view <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/#inflow_tab_1">your items in a grid or in rows</a>.</p><p>Any items without an image in your inFlow database are replaced with a generic colored placeholder image.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="item-details">Item details</h2><p>Customers can click on any item to get more details about it. If you&#8217;ve set up the Showroom to display descriptions, quantities in stock, measurements, or other information, it will be here. If you&#8217;ve enabled order taking, your customers can select a quantity of the item and add it to their order.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1731" height="846" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/4-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37977" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/4-1.png 1731w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/4-1-1280x626.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/4-1-980x479.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/4-1-480x235.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 1731px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="setup">Setup</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="setup-1">Setup</h2><p>If you&#8217;re logged into the inFlow Inventory Windows app, you can use the shortcut to redirect you to the Showroom settings by clicking on Main Menu &gt; <em>Options</em> &gt; <em>Online Showroom</em>. Your web browser will open, and you can click on the <em>Showroom </em>tab.</p><p>If you&#8217;re already logged into the inFlow web app, then you can <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">access the Showroom settings from here</a>. Please note that the Showroom can only be accessed by inFlow Inventory admins.</p><p>To change the Showroom settings, click on <em>Turn on Showroom</em>.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1003" height="419" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/5.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37981" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/5.png 1003w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/5-980x409.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/5-480x201.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1003px, 100vw" /></figure><p>Once enabled, the Showroom section gives you the option to preview your Showroom or copy the URL for your Showroom site for you to share with others.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="showroom-settings">Showroom settings</h2><p>The <em>Showroom general settings</em> are where you can set up how your Showroom will look to your customers. The general settings almost act as a template for when you decide to create personalized Showrooms for your customers.</p><p>Under the <em>Showroom general settings</em> heading, click <span style="box-sizing: border-box; margin: 0px; padding: 0px;">the <em>Edit settings</em> button to select the products, custom fields, and relative information that you want to display</span> in your Showroom.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="930" height="405" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/6.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37983" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/6.png 930w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/6-480x209.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 930px, 100vw" /></figure><p>You&#8217;ll now see a full list of settings you can change to personalize your Showroom. You can click the <em>Preview Showroom</em> link on the bottom left at any time to take a look at your changes.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="453" height="590" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7.png" alt="Showroom settings, where you can customize the color scheme." class="wp-image-37985" style="width:386px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7.png 453w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7-230x300.png 230w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7-18x24.png 18w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7-28x36.png 28w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/7-37x48.png 37w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 453px) 100vw, 453px" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="theme-color">Theme color</h3><p>The Theme color offers suggested theme colors based on the color scheme of the logo uploaded in your inFlow Account settings. If you don&#8217;t have a logo uploaded, the Showroom will show the default blue colors. You can also click the &#8220;+&#8221; button to add additional colors with the color picker or by adding the color #HEX code.</p><p>In this example, the shades of orange and brown inFlow suggest being based on the inFlow logo uploaded in the inFlow Account settings. Please see the two images below as an example.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="210" height="190" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/8.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54701" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/8.png 210w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/8-24x22.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/8-36x33.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/8-48x43.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 210px) 100vw, 210px" /></figure><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="436" height="67" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9.png" alt="" class="wp-image-54703" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9.png 436w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9-300x46.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9-24x4.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9-36x6.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/9-48x7.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="layout">Layout</h3><p>The layout settings give you the option of how you want your products to be displayed in your Showroom. There are two options, List and Grid. The List view is best for displaying products with longer names, and the Grid view is great for showing off product photos.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="3453" height="1049" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/10.png" alt="The Online Showroom with products listed in a grid view or list view." class="wp-image-54699" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/10.png 3453w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/10-1280x389.png 1280w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/10-980x298.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/10-480x146.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) and (max-width: 1280px) 1280px, (min-width: 1281px) 3453px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="font">Font</h3><p>This area is where you can select the font you&#8217;d like your Showroom to have. </p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="294" height="157" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/11.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37993" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/11.png 294w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/11-24x13.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/11-36x19.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/11-48x26.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 294px) 100vw, 294px" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="text-banner-and-banner-image">Text banner and banner image</h3><p>In this section, you can add a banner at the top of your online Showroom to match your company&#8217;s branding. You can use both banners or just one.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="456" height="246" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37995" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12.png 456w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12-300x162.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12-24x13.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12-36x19.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/12-48x26.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 456px) 100vw, 456px" /></figure><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1105" height="781" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/13.png" alt="Showroom example with products showing in grid view. " class="wp-image-37996" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/13.png 1105w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/13-980x693.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/13-480x339.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1105px, 100vw" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Note the Text banner from the Showroom settings is listed at the very top of the page, followed by the Banner image.</p></blockquote><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="products">Products</h3><p>To select the products to show in your Showroom, click on the arrow in the products section. You can also exclude out-of-stock products by adding a checkmark to the <em>Exclude products when they are out of stock</em> setting.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="449" height="118" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14.png" alt="" class="wp-image-37998" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14.png 449w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14-300x79.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14-24x6.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14-36x9.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/14-48x13.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 449px) 100vw, 449px" /></figure><p>Click on the checkbox of a category to display the products in that category in your Showroom.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="454" height="736" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15.png" alt="Showroom settings. This image shows how you can add products in bulk to show on your Showroom by category. " class="wp-image-37999" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15.png 454w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15-185x300.png 185w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15-15x24.png 15w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15-22x36.png 22w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/15-30x48.png 30w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 454px) 100vw, 454px" /></figure><p>If you only want to display a subset of the products in a category, click on the grey arrow and select the products you want. You may also search for a specific product.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="221" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38000" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16.png 448w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16-300x148.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16-24x12.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16-36x18.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/16-48x24.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="show-and-take-stock">Show and take stock</h3><p>You can choose to show and take stock from either all your inventory locations or from a single location. This option is on the <em>Edit settings &gt; General Showroom settings</em> section, and you&#8217;ll also be able to adjust it on the <em>Showroom special acces</em>s section on each customer&#8217;s settings.</p><p>New customers added to your Showroom will have their location matching your general settings location unless they already have a Location set on their Preferences on the Customer page.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>Note:</strong> Any existing Customers who have a default location set on their Customer page and were invited to Showroom will only see stock available from those locations. Orders from these customers will also automatically have that location set on the Sales Order.</p></blockquote><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="451" height="168" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38004" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17.png 451w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17-300x112.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17-24x9.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17-36x13.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/17-48x18.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 451px) 100vw, 451px" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="display-settings">Display settings</h3><p>This section is for customizing what information from inFlow will be displayed on the Showroom. Choose to display the quantity in stock, whether an item is in stock, its image, category, description, measurements, and/or custom fields.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>For product quantities, the Online Showroom only shows the <strong>available quantity</strong>, not the quantity on hand.</p></blockquote><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="453" height="387" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18.png" alt="Showroom product display settings. You can choose how the stock information will be shown, or if you want to show the product category or description. " class="wp-image-38006" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18.png 453w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18-300x256.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18-24x21.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18-36x31.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/18-48x41.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 453px) 100vw, 453px" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="contact-info">Contact info</h3><p>The Contact info section lets your customers reach you. Your phone number will show up on the Showroom contact section and any messages your customers send will use this email. Also if an order is made by an invited customer, an email will be sent to it with the order information.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="456" height="218" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38007" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19.png 456w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19-300x143.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19-24x11.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19-36x17.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/19-48x23.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 456px) 100vw, 456px" /></figure><p></p><p></p><p></p><p>Click on the <em>Save </em>button at the bottom of your screen and your Online Showroom is complete! To take a look at it, scroll to the top of the Showroom screen and click the <em>Preview public Showroom</em> button.</p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="access">Access</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="giving-access-to-the-showroom">Giving access to the Showroom</h2><p>Now that you&#8217;ve created your Showroom, you have the option to allow it to be seen by everyone, or you can keep it invitation-only.&nbsp;</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FmUp2BTMqUAk%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="public-showroom">Public showroom</h2><p>To allow your Showroom to have public access click on the <em>Edit public showroom settings</em> button on the <em>Public showroom </em>tile.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="250" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38010" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20.png 470w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20-300x160.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20-24x13.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20-36x19.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/20-48x26.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></figure><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Toggle the <em>Enable </em>switch on.</li><li>There will be a few settings listed below. You can choose to show prices for your products, select your Pricing/Currency, and customize the signup message.</li></ol><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>Note:</strong> Keep in mind that the <em>Show prices</em> setting needs to be selected to allow customers to order from you. If the prices aren&#8217;t shown on your customer&#8217;s special Showroom invitation then they won&#8217;t be able to place an order.</p></blockquote><ol start="3"><li>&nbsp;Once you&#8217;re done with the changes, click <em>Save</em>.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="453" height="388" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38013" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21.png 453w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21-300x257.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21-24x21.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21-36x31.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/21-48x41.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 453px) 100vw, 453px" /></figure><p>The signup button is displayed on the public access Showroom for a new user to sign up as a customer in your inFlow database.</p><p>You can now copy the Showroom link and send it out to start sharing. You will find your Showroom URL on the top of the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Showroom setup screen</a>.&nbsp;</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="933" height="405" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31.png" alt="inFlow Showroom settings. This image is showing what your Showroom URL is. " class="wp-image-38016" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31.png 933w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31-480x208.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 933px, 100vw" /></figure><p>You also have the option to customize your domain if you have the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/#inflow_tab_4">Showroom Pro add-on</a>.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="private-showrooms">Private showrooms</h2><p>If you&#8217;d like to send a custom view of your Showroom to someone or allow them to place orders through your Showroom, you can do that with the Private showrooms feature. You can select which products and details your customers can see, and you&#8217;ll also be able to display a specific location to them.</p><p></p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>There is no limitation on the number of invitations that you can send out for your online Showroom.</p></blockquote><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Click the <em>Invite someone</em> button on the <em>Private showrooms</em> tile.</li></ol><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>If you want to invite all your customers with an existing email address, click on the <em>Invite all remaining</em> button. The default Showroom settings will be applied to these customers.</p></blockquote><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="779" height="190" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/22-1.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38017" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/22-1.png 779w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/22-1-480x117.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 779px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="2"><li>An invitation window will open. If you&#8217;re inviting someone to your Showroom who isn&#8217;t a customer listed in your inFlow database, select <em>Invite with email</em> and then enter their name and email address. If you&#8217;re inviting an existing inFlow customer, choose <em>Select customer</em> and then select their name from the drop-down menu. Their email address and name will auto-populate. Click <em>Next </em>to go to the next step.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="454" height="300" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38020" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23.png 454w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23-300x198.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23-24x16.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23-36x24.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/23-48x32.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 454px) 100vw, 454px" /></figure><ol start="3" class="wp-block-list"><li>In this window, you have the option to customize which products and settings will be viewed by the recipient. Select the Showroom settings from the products, stock, price, and display settings, as well as the message sent to them. If you want them to view your Showroom with the default Showroom settings, turn on the <em>Match general settings</em> toggle next to the <em>Products</em>, <em>Stock</em>, and<em> Display settings</em> heading. To learn more about each of these areas, check the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/#inflow_tab_1">Setup tab of this article</a>.</li><li>You can change the subject line of the Showroom invitation, and you can send a custom message to the person you&#8217;re inviting by clicking on <em>Custom message</em> in the message section. Click the <em>Send invite</em> button when you&#8217;re done.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="453" height="269" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38022" style="width:823px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24.png 453w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24-300x178.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24-24x14.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24-36x21.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/24-48x29.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 453px) 100vw, 453px" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>Note:</strong> Showroom invites are valid for two weeks once the initial email is sent, and it&#8217;s followed by two reminders.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-placing-orders-with-the-showroom">Placing orders with the showroom</h2><p>If your customers need a hand with setting up the online showroom and placing orders, feel free to share this helpful video with them!</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FwOulBds_xVQ%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="taking-orders">Taking orders</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="enable-order-taking">Enable order taking</h2><p>Ordering through your online Showroom is a fast and easy way for your customers to buy more of your products.</p><p></p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p><strong>Note:</strong> Show Price must be selected to allow showroom to take orders</p></blockquote><p></p><p>Once your <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/#inflow_tab_1">Showroom is enabled</a>, you&#8217;ll need to edit your checkout settings. In your <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Showroom setup screen</a>, click on <em>Edit checkout settings</em> on the <em>Checkout </em>tile.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="468" height="242" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38024" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25.png 468w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25-300x155.png 300w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25-24x12.png 24w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25-36x19.png 36w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/25-48x25.png 48w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 468px) 100vw, 468px" /></figure><p>A new window will appear. To start taking orders, make sure the <em>Checkout </em>section is enabled (this should automatically be set for you, but here&#8217;s where you go if you want to change the setting). Click <em>Save</em>.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="accepting-payment">Accepting payment</h3><p>If your business is located/registered in the United States or Canada, you can sign up for inFlow Pay to accept credit card payments from your Showroom orders! For complete details on this, <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/how-can-i-accept-payments-in-inflow-cloud/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">take a look at our inFlow Pay article here</a>.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="order-status">Order status</h3><p>If you&#8217;d like to confirm your customer&#8217;s orders before your stock in inFlow is reserved, click the <em>Requires confirmation</em> toggle. Showroom orders will be created in inFlow with an Unconfirmed status. Unconfirmed orders do not count against your quantity reserved until you confirm them. Any team member with full edit rights to sales orders can mark an order as confirmed. We recommend enabling this option if you need more control over the amount of stock your customers reserve through your Showroom.</p><p>If the <em>Order status </em>is set not to require confirmation, Showroom orders will come into inFlow as unfulfilled.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="abandoned-cart">Abandoned cart</h3><p>When a user adds a product to the Showroom cart but doesn&#8217;t proceed to checkout and completes the purchase, you can toggle this feature to remind them via email. This is part of the <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/#inflow_tab_4">Showroom Pro add-on</a>.</p><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="messaging">Messaging</h3><p>You can set a Checkout message and a Post-order message on this screen. This is what will be displayed to your customers when they place an order.</p><p></p><p></p><p>After saving these settings, anyone you&#8217;ve sent a special Showroom invitation to will be able to place orders through your online Showroom.</p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="how-a-customer-places-an-order">How a customer places an order</h2><p>Your customers will be able to add items to their order from the main Showroom or individual product pages. At the top right, they&#8217;ll see how many items they have in their shopping bag.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-large"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="719" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/26-1024x719.png" alt="Showroom: showing how to add quantity to add to the cart. " class="wp-image-38026" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/26-1024x719.png 1024w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/26-980x688.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/26-480x337.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1024px, 100vw" /></figure><p>After clicking the shopping bag icon, the order summary will appear. Here, your customer can edit the quantities of the items they&#8217;ll order. Once they&#8217;re ready, they just need to click on the <em>Checkout</em> button to proceed.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1150" height="796" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/27.png" alt="The customer showroom, showing the items in the cart while shopping. " class="wp-image-38027" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/27.png 1150w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/27-980x678.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/27-480x332.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1150px, 100vw" /></figure><p>On the <em>Checkout</em> page, your customer can enter their contact, shipping, and billing details. Any special requests the customer has can also be entered here. The items that the customer has ordered can be seen again if they click on the <em>Show Order Summary</em> link. They&#8217;ll also see the checkout message you&#8217;ve entered into your Showroom settings.</p><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>If you&#8217;ve entered any of this information into the customer&#8217;s record in inFlow, this will be pre-filled for them. If the Showroom user isn&#8217;t attached to a customer in inFlow, a new customer will be created for you using the Showroom user&#8217;s email, and any information they fill in here will be included. To finish the process, your customer just needs to click on <em>Place order</em>.</p></blockquote><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1150" height="899" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/28.png" alt="" class="wp-image-38029" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/28.png 1150w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/28-980x766.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/28-480x375.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1150px, 100vw" /></figure><p>An order will be created, and the customer will see a confirmation screen showing them the order number and the post-order message from your Showroom settings.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1118" height="525" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/29.png" alt="Confirmation of order placed on the Showroom. " class="wp-image-38030" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/29.png 1118w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/29-980x460.png 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/29-480x225.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 980px) 980px, (min-width: 981px) 1118px, 100vw" /></figure><p>After an order is placed, both you and your customer will receive a confirmation email notifying you that the order has been created. Both of you can reply to this email to contact the other party if any follow-up is needed.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="608" height="596" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/30.png" alt="Image of order confirmation email that is sent to customers when they complete a Showroom order. " class="wp-image-38031" style="width:608px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/30.png 608w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/30-480x471.png 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 608px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-placing-orders-with-the-showroom-0">Placing orders with the showroom</h2><p>If your customers need assistance with setting up the online showroom or placing orders, feel free to share this helpful video with them.</p><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FwOulBds_xVQ%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading inflow-support-tab" id="showroom-pro">Showroom Pro</h2><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="showroom-pro">Showroom Pro</h2><p>Showroom Pro is an<strong> add-on</strong> that allows you to be able to set up your own customized Showroom web address (<a href="#domain">custom domain</a>) and access e-commerce features that email your customers when they&#8217;ve added to their cart and didn&#8217;t place an order (<a href="#cart">abandoned cart</a>). Showroom Pro also <a href="#branding">removes any inFlow branding from your documents</a>.</p><p>For more information, please <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/contact-support" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">contact our Support team here</a>. </p><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading">Showroom &amp; Showroom Pro webinar</h2><figure class="wp-block-embed-youtube wp-block-embed is-type-video is-provider-youtube "><a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/plugins/wp-youtube-lyte/lyteCache.php?origThumbUrl=https%3A%2F%2Fi.ytimg.com%2Fvi%2FeS0CkRxNJ2k%2Fhqdefault.jpg" alt="YouTube Video"></a><br /><br /><figcaption></figcaption></figure><p></p><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="domain">Setting up a custom Showroom domain</h2><p>You can customize your Showroom domain on your web app. To do so:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Log in to <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">app.inflowinventory.com</a> with an admin account.</li><li>Go to Main Menu &gt; <em>Options </em>&gt; <em>Showroom </em>&gt; <em>Customize your domain</em>.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="980" height="458" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31.jpg" alt="Online Showroom settings page, showing the Customize your domain&quot; button. " class="wp-image-38034" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31.jpg 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/31-480x224.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 980px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="3"><li>On this window, you can set a custom domain.</li></ol><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>You must own that domain already.</p></blockquote><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="757" height="446" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/32.jpg" alt="" class="wp-image-38036" style="width:568px;height:335px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/32.jpg 757w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/32-480x283.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 757px, 100vw" /></figure><ol start="4"><li>On the next screen, you&#8217;ll have the Type, Hostname, and Target name which you&#8217;ll need to use when setting up with your Domain Provider to customize how your customers can reach your showroom. Make sure they are the same.</li></ol><p>Once that&#8217;s done, it can take from 1 to 3 days for those changes to be applied. In most cases, it will take just a few minutes.</p><p>When you access your Showroom settings, you&#8217;ll see the verification status. Once you submit your domain, it will display as <em>Pending Verification</em>, and it will disappear when the domain is approved.</p><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="980" height="437" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/33.jpg" alt="inFlow Showroom page, showing a custom domain pending verification " class="wp-image-38037" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/33.jpg 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/33-480x214.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 980px, 100vw" /></figure><blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow"><p>Even after the custom domain is verified, there could be a period of time before there&#8217;s a valid SSL certificate for it. This should be available within approximately 5-10 minutes, and during that time the link won&#8217;t work.</p></blockquote><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="cart">Abandoned cart</h2><p>When a user adds a product to the Showroom cart but doesn’t proceed to checkout and completes the purchase, they create an abandoned cart.</p><p>We’ve added report and email reminders to notify both you and your customers about products they&#8217;ve forgotten to purchase.</p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="h-abandoned-cart-report">Abandoned cart report</h3><p><a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/reports/abandoned-cart" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">The abandoned cart report</a> is created when a customer hasn’t interacted with their Showroom cart for over an hour after adding a product.</p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="980" height="551" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/34.jpg" alt="Online Showroom Abandoned Cart report." class="wp-image-38039" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/34.jpg 980w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/34-480x270.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 980px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><h3 class="wp-block-heading" id="customer-email-reminder">Customer email reminder</h3><p>You can set inFlow to automatically send a reminder to your customers if they add items to the cart and don&#8217;t complete the purchase.</p><p>If enabled, inFlow will check for abandoned carts every 15 minutes and trigger an email reminder to the customer.&nbsp;</p><p>inFlow will not send the email if:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>The customer is still browsing the Showroom (if there was any activity within the past hour).</li><li>We&#8217;ve already sent out an email regarding the same cart, and there has been no new activity.</li></ul><p>To enable the customer notification, you&#8217;ll need to:</p><ol class="wp-block-list"><li>Go to the <a href="https://app.inflowinventory.com/options/showroom" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Showroom settings</a> (Main Menu &gt; <em>Showroom</em>)</li><li> Click on <em>Edit checkout settings</em>.</li><li>Toggle the <em>Notify customer after 1 hour</em> button and save.</li></ol><p></p><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="723" height="1024" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/35.jpg" alt="Checkout settings, showing the Cart Reminder feature that will email a customer 1 hour after they've abandoned their cart. " class="wp-image-38040" style="width:542px;height:768px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/35.jpg 723w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/35-480x680.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 723px, 100vw" /></figure><h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="branding">Remove inFlow branding</h2><p>This add-on gives you the option to remove the following from the Showroom:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>Footer from all pages, including the Showroom special access login page.</li><li>&#8220;inFlow Showroom&#8221; title in the webpage title.</li><li>inFlow branding from Showroom emails.</li><li>&#8220;An inFlow Inventory Showroom&#8221; title in the Showroom footer.</li></ul><p>This add-on gives you the option to remove the following from documents emailed from inFlow:</p><ul class="wp-block-list"><li>inFlow footer from online documents.</li><li>inFlow branding from emails.</li></ul><figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="919" height="856" src="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/37.jpg" alt="" class="wp-image-38046" style="width:460px;height:428px" srcset="https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/37.jpg 919w, https://www.inflowinventory.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/37-480x447.jpg 480w" sizes="auto, (min-width: 0px) and (max-width: 480px) 480px, (min-width: 481px) 919px, 100vw" /></figure><p></p><p></p><p>For more information, please <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/contact-support" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">contact our Support team here</a>.</p><p>The post <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal">inFlow&#8217;s Online Showroom: inFlow&#8217;s B2B portal</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.inflowinventory.com">inFlow Inventory</a>.</p>]]></content:encoded><wfw:commentRss>https://www.inflowinventory.com/support/cloud/showroom-inflows-b2b-portal/feed</wfw:commentRss><slash:comments>1</slash:comments></item></channel></rss>